Toshiba 6F3B0253 Users Manual

: Toshiba Toshiba-6F3B0253-Users-Manual-131794 toshiba-6f3b0253-users-manual-131794 toshiba pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 301

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

6F3B0253
UM-TS01∗∗∗-E031

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER

PROSEC

T1- 16S

USER’S MANUAL
− Basic Hardware and Function −

TOSHIBA CORPORATION

6F3B0253

Important Information
Misuse of this equipment can result in property damage or human injury.
Because controlled system applications vary widely, you should satisfy yourself
as to the acceptability of this equipment for your intended purpose.
In no event will Toshiba Corporation be responsible or liable for either indirect
or consequential damage or injury that may result from the use of this equipment.
No patent liability is assumed by Toshiba Corporation with respect to use of
information, illustrations, circuits, equipment or examples of application in this
publication.
Toshiba Corporation reserves the right to make changes and improvements to this
publication and/or related products at any time without notice. No obligation shall be
incurred other than as noted in this publication.
This publication is copyrighted and contains proprietary material. No part of this book
may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any
means  electrical, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise  without
obtaining prior written permission from Toshiba Corporation.
© TOSHIBA Corporation 2001. All rights reserved

IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Publication number: UM-TS01∗∗∗-E031
1st edition April 2001, 2nd edition November 2001

6F3B0253

CE Marking
The Programmable Controller PROSEC T1-16S (hereafter called T1-16S) complies with the
requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and Low Voltage Directive 72/23/EEC under the
condition of use according to the instructions described in this manual.
The contents of the conformity are shown below.

Application of
Council Directive

EMC :
LVD :

Manufacture’s Name

:

Address

:

89/336/EEC (as amended by 91/263/EEC and 92/31/EEC)
72/23/EEC (as amended by 93/68/EEC)
Toshiba Corporation,
Fuchu Operations-Social Infrastructure Systems
1, Toshiba-Cho
Fuchu-shi
TOKYO 183-8511
Japan

declares, that the product
Product Name

:

Programmable Controller , T1-16S

Model Number

:

TDR116S6S, TDR116S6C
TDR116S3S, TDR116S3C

conforms to the following Product Specifications:
EMC
Radiated Interference
Mains Interference
Radiated Susceptibility
Conducted RFI Susceptibility
Electrostatic Discharge
Electrical Fast Transient

:
:
:
:
:
:

EN 55011 Group 1 Class A
EN 55011 Group 1 Class A
ENV50140
ENV50141, IEC100-4-6.
IEC1000-4-2
IEC1000-4-4

LVD

:

EN61131-2:1995

3.10
4.

Dielectric Properties
Mechanical Requirements

Supplementary information
:
(1) Included Handy Programmer THP911A*S.
(2) Included each type of associated input/output unit in a typical configuration.
(3) Product must be installed in accordance with manufacturers instructions

Basic Hardware and Function

1

6F3B0253

UL/c-UL Listing
The Programmable Controller PROSEC T1-16S (hereafter called T1-16S) is UL/c-UL listed as
shown below.

UL and c-UL Listing
File Number :
Product Name :
Product Covered :

E95637
Programmable Controller , T1-16S
Main Unit
TDR116S6S, TDR116S6C,
TDR116S3S, TDR116S3C
I/O module
TDI116M*S, TDD116M*S, TDO116M*S,
TAD121M*S, TAD131M*S, TDA121M*S, TDA131M*S,
TFR112M*S
Peripherals
TRM102**S, TCU111**S, THP911A*S

UL and c-UL Listing For Use in Hazardous Locations
File Number :
Product Name :
Product Covered :
Locations Class :
Important Notice :

2

T1-16S User’s Manual

E184034
Programmable Controller , T1-16S
Main Unit
TDR116S6S, TDR116S6C
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D
1. THIS EQUIPMENT IS SUITABLE FOR USE IN CLASS I,
DIVISION 2, GROUPS A, B, C, D OR NON-HAZARDOUS
LOCATIONS ONLY.
2. WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - SUBSTITUTION OF
COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR CLASS I,
DIVISION 2.
3. WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - DO NOT DISCONNECT
EQUIPMENT UNLESS POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF
OR THE AREA IS KNOWN TO BE NON-HAZARDOUS.

6F3B0253

Safety Precautions
This manual is prepared for users of Toshiba’s Programmable Controller T1-16S.
Read this manual thoroughly before using the T1-16S. Also, keep this manual and related
manuals so that you can read them anytime while the T1-16S is in operation.

General Information
1. The T1-16S has been designed and manufactured for use in an industrial
environment. However, the T1-16S is not intended to be used for systems which may
endanger human life. Consult Toshiba if you intend to use the T1-16S for a special
application, such as transportation machines, medical apparatus, aviation and space
systems, nuclear controls, submarine systems, etc.
2. The T1-16S has been manufactured under strict quality control. However, to keep
safety of overall automated system, fail-safe systems should be considered outside
the T1-16S.
3. In installation, wiring, operation and maintenance of the T1-16S, it is assumed that the
users have general knowledge of industrial electric control systems.
If this product is handled or operated improperly, electrical shock, fire or damage to
this product could result.
4. This manual has been written for users who are familiar with Programmable
Controllers and industrial control equipment. Contact Toshiba if you have any
questions about this manual.
5. Sample programs and circuits described in this manual are provided for explaining the
operations and applications of the T1-16S. You should test completely if you use them
as a part of your application system.

Hazard Classifications
In this manual, the following two hazard classifications are used to explain the safety
precautions.

! WARNING

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury.

! CAUTION

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may
result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert
against unsafe practices.

Even a precaution is classified as CAUTION, it may cause serious results depending on
the situation. Observe all the safety precautions described on this manual.
Basic Hardware and Function

3

6F3B0253

Safety Precautions
Installation:

! CAUTION
1. Excess temperature, humidity, vibration, shocks, or dusty and corrosive gas
environment can cause electrical shock, fire or malfunction. Install and use the T116S and related equipment in the environment described in this manual.
2. Improper installation directions or insufficient installation can cause fire or the units
to drop. Install the T1-16S and related equipment in accordance with the instructions
described in this manual.
3. Turn off power before installing or removing any units, modules, racks, terminal
blocks or battery. Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage to the T116S and related equipment.
4. Entering wire scraps or other foreign debris into to the T1-16S and related
equipment can cause fire or malfunction. Pay attention to prevent entering them into
the T1-16S and related equipment during installation and wiring.
5. Turn off power immediately if the T1-16S or related equipment is emitting smoke or
odor. Operation under such situation can cause fire or electrical shock. Also
unauthorized repairing will cause fire or serious accidents. Do not attempt to repair.
Contact Toshiba for repairing.

Wiring:

! CAUTION
1. Turn off power before wiring to minimize the risk of electrical shock.
2. Exposed conductive parts of wire can cause electrical shock. Use crimp-style
terminals with insulating sheath or insulating tape to cover the conductive parts. Also
close the terminal covers securely on the terminal blocks when wiring has been
completed.
3. Operation without grounding may cause electrical shock or malfunction. Connect the
ground terminal on the T1-16S to the system ground.
4. Applying excess power voltage to the T1-16S can cause explosion or fire. Apply
power of the specified ratings described in the manual.
5. Improper wiring can cause fire, electrical shock or malfunction. Observe local
regulations on wiring and grounding.

4

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Safety Precautions
Operation:

! WARNING
1. Configure emergency stop and safety interlocking circuits outside the T1-16S.
Otherwise, malfunction of the T1-16S can cause injury or serious accidents.

! CAUTION
2. Operate the T1-16S and the related modules with closing the terminal covers. Keep
hands away from terminals while power on, to avoid the risk of electrical shock.
3. When you attempt to perform force outputs, RUN/HALT controls, etc. during
operation, carefully check for safety.
4. Turn on power to the T1-16S before turning on power to the loads. Failure to do so
may cause unexpected behavior of the loads.
5. Do not use any modules of the T1-16S for the purpose other than specified. This
can cause electrical shock or injury.
6. Do not modify the T1-16S and related equipment in hardware nor software. This can
cause fire, electrical shock or injury.
7. Configure the external circuit so that the external 24 Vdc power required for
transistor output circuits and power to the loads are switched on/off simultaneously.
Also, turn off power to the loads before turning off power to the T1-16S.
8. Install fuses appropriate to the load current in the external circuits for the outputs.
Failure to do so can cause fire in case of load over-current.
9. Check for proper connections on wires, connectors and modules. Insufficient contact
can cause malfunction or damage to the T1-16S and related equipment.

Basic Hardware and Function

5

6F3B0253

Safety Precautions
Maintenance:

! CAUTION
1. Turn off power before removing or replacing units, modules, terminal blocks or wires.
Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage to the T1-16S and related
equipment.
2. When you remove both input and output terminal blocks with wires for maintenance
purpose, pay attention to prevent inserting them upside down.
3. Touch a grounded metal part to discharge the static electricity on your body before
touching the equipment.
4. Otherwise, charged static electricity on your body can cause malfunction or failure.
5. Do not disassemble the T1-16S because there are hazardous voltage parts inside.
6. Perform daily checks, periodical checks and cleaning to maintain the system in
normal condition and to prevent unnecessary troubles.
7. Check by referring “Troubleshooting” section of this manual when operating
improperly. Contact Toshiba for repairing if the T1-16S or related equipment is failed.
Toshiba will not guarantee proper operation nor safety for unauthorized repairing.
8. The contact reliability of the output relays will reduce if the switching exceeds the
specified life. Replace the unit or module if exceeded.
9. The battery used in T1-16S may present a risk of fire of chemical burn if mistreated.
Do not recharge, disassemble, heat above 100ºC (212ºF), or incinerate.
10.Replace battery with CR2032 only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire
or explosion.
11.Dispose of used battery promptly. Keep away from children. Do not disassemble
and do not dispose of in fire.

6

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Safety Precautions

Safety Label
The safety label as shown on the right is
attached to the power terminal of the
T1-16S.
Remove the mount paper before wiring.
Peel off the label from the mount paper
and stick it near the power terminals
where it can be readily seen.

! CAUTION
Do not touch terminals
while power on.
Hazardous voltage can shock, burn or cause death.
Do not touch terminals while power on.
Read related manual thoroughly for safety.
Stick this seal on unit or near unit.
Take off this sheet before wiring.

Contact Toshiba if the label is damaged.

Basic Hardware and Function

7

6F3B0253

About This Manual
About This Manual
This manual has been prepared for first-time users of Toshiba’s Programmable Controller
T1-16S to enable a full understanding of the configuration of the equipment, and to
enable the user to obtain the maximum benefits of the equipment.
This manual introduces the T1-16S, and explains the system configuration,
specifications, installation and wiring for T1-16S’s basic hardware. This manual provides
the information for designing T1-16S user program, such as the internal operation,
memory configuration, I/O allocation and programming instructions. Information for
maintenance and troubleshooting are also provided in this manual.
The T1-16S’s computer link function and T1-16S’s multi-purpose communication
functions are covered by the separate manual. Read the T1-16S User’s Manual Communication Function - for details.

Inside This Manual
This manual consists of 10 main sections and an appendix.
Section 1 outlines the T1-16S configuration. To fully understand the T1-16S, it is
important to read this section carefully. Sections 2, to 4 describe the hardware used in
designing external circuits and panels. Sections 5 to 7 are mainly concerned with
software. Section 8 explains the T1-16S’s special I/O functions. Sections 9 and 10
describe the maintenance procedure for the T1-16S, to ensure safe operation and long
service life.

Related Manuals
The following related manuals are available for T1-16S. Besides this manual, read the
following manuals for your better understanding.
T1-16S User’s Manual
- Basic Hardware and Function - (this manual)
- I/O Modules - Communication Function T-Series Handy Programmer (HP911) Operation Manual
T-Series Program Development System (T-PDS) User’s Manual

8

T1-16S User’s Manual

UM-TS01∗∗∗-E031
UM-TS01∗∗∗-E034
UM-TS01∗∗∗-E033
UM-TS03∗∗∗-E025
UM-TS03∗∗∗-E045

6F3B0253

About This Manual
Terminology
The following is a list of abbreviations and acronyms used in this manual.
µs
ASCII
AWG
BCC
CCW
CPU
CW
EEPROM
H
I/O
LED
LSB
ms
MSB
PWM
RAM
ROM
Vac
Vdc

microsecond
American Standard Code For Information Interchange
American Wire Gage
Block Check Code
Counter-Clockwise
Central Processing Unit
Clockwise
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
hexadecimal (when it appears in front of an alphanumeric string)
Input/Output
Light Emitting Diode
Least Significant Bit
millisecond
Most Significant Bit
Pulse Width Modulation
Random Access Memory
Read Only Memory
AC voltage
DC voltage

Basic Hardware and Function

9

6F3B0253

Contents
Contents

10

Safety Precautions

..................................................................................

3

About This Manual

..................................................................................

8

1.

System Configuration

....................................................................

13

1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9

Introducing the T1-16S
................................................................
Features ..............................................................................................
System configuration ..........................................................................
I/O expansion ......................................................................................
Components ........................................................................................
Basic unit .........................................................................................
I/O modules ......................................................................................
Options ............................................................................................
Programmer port function ..................................................................
RS-485 port communication function .................................................
Real-time data link system .................................................................
Peripheral tools ..................................................................................

14
16
19
20
21
21
25
26
27
28
32
33

2.

Specifications ..................................................................................

37

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4

General specifications ........................................................................
Functional specifications ....................................................................
I/O specifications ................................................................................
External dimensions ...........................................................................

38
40
42
46

3.

I/O Application Precautions

..........................................................

47

3.1
3.2

Application precautions for input signals ............................................
Application precautions for output signals ..........................................

48
50

4.

Installation and Wiring

...................................................................

53

4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6

Environmental conditions ...................................................................
Installing the unit .................................................................................
Wiring terminals ..................................................................................
Grounding ...........................................................................................
Power supply wiring ............................................................................
I/O wiring ............................................................................................

54
55
57
58
59
61

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Contents
5.

Operating System Overview

.........................................................

63

5.1
5.2
5.3

Operation modes ................................................................................
About the built-in EEPROM ................................................................
Scanning .............................................................................................

64
66
69

6.

Programming Information

73

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.6.1
6.6.2
6.6.3
6.6.4
6.6.5
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10

Devices and registers ......................................................................... 74
Index modification ............................................................................... 86
Real-time clock/calendar .................................................................... 88
I/O allocation ....................................................................................... 89
T1-16S memory mode setting.............................................................. 91
User program configuration ................................................................ 92
Main program .................................................................................. 94
Sub-program #1 .............................................................................. 95
Timer interrupt program .................................................................. 95
I/O interrupt programs ..................................................................... 96
Subroutines .................................................................................... 97
Programming language ...................................................................... 98
Program execution sequence ............................................................ 99
On-line debug support functions ........................................................ 100
Password protection ........................................................................... 103

7.

Instructions ...................................................................................... 105

7.1
7.2

List of instructions .............................................................................. 106
Instruction specifications .................................................................... 116

8.

Special I/O Functions

8.1
8.2
8.3
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7

Special I/O function overview .............................................................
Variable input filter constant ..............................................................
High speed counter ............................................................................
Single phase up-counter .................................................................
Single phase speed-counter ............................................................
Quadrature bi-pulse counter ............................................................
Interrupt input function ........................................................................
Analog setting function .......................................................................
Pulse output function ..........................................................................
PWM output function ..........................................................................

9.

Maintenance and Checks

9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5

Precautions during operation .............................................................
Daily checks ........................................................................................
Periodic checks ...................................................................................
Maintenance parts ...............................................................................
Battery .................................................................................................

.............................................................

.................................................................... 255
256
260
261
262
263
265
268
270
271
273

.............................................................. 275
276
277
278
279
280

Basic Hardware and Function

11

6F3B0253

Contents
10.

Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 281

10.1
10.1.1
10.1.2
10.1.3
10.1.4
10.1.5
10.1.6
10.2

Troubleshooting procedure ................................................................
Power supply check .........................................................................
CPU check .......................................................................................
Program check .................................................................................
Input check .......................................................................................
Output check ....................................................................................
Environmental problem ....................................................................
Self-diagnostic items ..........................................................................

282
283
284
284
285
286
287
288

Appendix ......................................................................................................... 293
A.1
A.2

12

List of models and types ..................................................................... 294
Instruction index ................................................................................. 295

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Section 1
System Configuration

1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9

Introducing the T1-16S, 14
Features, 16
System configuration, 19
I/O expansion, 20
Components, 21
Computer link system, 27
T1-16S Communication function, 28
Real-time data link system, 32
Peripheral tools, 33

Basic Hardware and Function

13

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration
1.1 Introducing the T1-16S
The T1-16 is compact, block style, high-performance programmable controller with a
range of 16 to 144 input and output points.
The figure below shows the T1 Series line-up. The T1 Series consists of the total 16
types.
T1 Series

T1

T1-16

T1-MDR16
T1-MAR16
T1-MDR16D

T1-28

T1-MDR28
T1-MAR28
T1-MDR28D
T1-MDR40
T1-MAR40
T1-MDR40D

T1-40

T1S

T1-16S

T1-MDR16SS
T1-MDR16SC
T1-MDR16SSD
T1-MDR16SCD

T1-40S

T1-MDR40S
T1-MAR40S
T1-MDR40SD

I/O points:
The T1 Series are available in five models, T1-16, T1-28, T1-40, T1-40S and T116S. Each model has the following I/O points.

Input
Output

T1-16
8 points

T1-16S

8 points
(6 relay plus 2 slid-state)

Expansion No

Up to 8 I/O
modules.
Total up to
144 points.

T1-28
14 points

T1-40
24 points

T1-40S

14 points
16 points
(12 relay plus (14 relay plus 2 solid-state)
2 slid-state)
No
2 option cards plus
1 expansion rack or unit.
Total up to 382 points.

The T1-16S can expand its I/O points by connecting I/O modules . Up to eight I/O
modules can be connected. If eight 16-point I/O modules are connected to the T116S, it can control up to 144 points.

14

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration
Memory capacity:
Program memory capacity of the T1 is 2 k steps. And that of the T1S is 8 k steps.
Whole the program and a part of data registers are stored in built-in EEPROM.
T1-16S
T1-16/28/40
T1-40S
RAM (for execution) and EEPROM (for back-up)
Memory
2 k steps
8 k steps
Program
(4
k mode or 8 k mode)
capacity
Data capacity Auxiliary relay: 1024 points Auxiliary relay: 4096 points
Timer:
64 points
Timer:
256 points
Counter:
64 points
Counter:
256 points
Data register: 1024 words Data register: 4096 words
Program and leading 512
Program and the user specified range of
EEPROM
words
of
Data
register
Data register (0 to 2048 words)
back-up
RAM back-up Capacitor: 6 hours or more Capacitor: 168 hours Capacitor: 1 hour
or more
or more
(at 25°C)
(at 77°F)
Battery: 2 years
or more
Control functions:
In addition to the basic relay ladder functions, the T1/T1S provides functions such as
data operations, arithmetic operations, various functions, etc. Furthermore, its highspeed counter functions, pulse output functions and data communication functions
allow its application to a wide scope of control systems.

Language
Number of
instructions
Subroutines
Execution speed
Real-time
clock/calendar
Communication

T1-16/28/40
T1-40S
T1-16S
Ladder diagram with function block
Basic:
17 types
Basic:
21 types Basic:
21 types
Function: 76 types
Function: 99 types Function: 97 types
16
256
(nesting not allowed) (up to 3 levels of nesting)
1.4 µs/contact, 2.3 µs/coil, 4.2 µs/transfer, 6.5 µs/addition
No
Yes (year, month, day, week, hours,
minutes, seconds)
RS-232C
RS-232C (programmer port),
(programmer port)
RS-485 (multi-purpose)

Construction:
The T1-16S is a compact, easy-handling block style programmable controller. The
T1-16S has all of the features of a block style controller. In addition, the T1-16S has
modular expandability. The T1-16S provides flexibility into the block style controller.
Series compatibility:
Programming instructions are upward compatible in the T-Series programmable
controllers. The T1/T1S programs can be used for other models of the T-Series, T2,
T2E, T2N, T3 and T3H. Peripheral tools can also be shared.

Basic Hardware and Function

15

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration
1.2 Features
I/O module support:
The T1-16S has an interface for connecting the I/O modules. Up to eight modules
can be connected to the T1-16S.
By using the 16 points I/O module, the T1-16S can control up to 144 I/O points.
Built-in high-speed counter:
Two single-phase or one quadrature (2-phase) pulses can be counted. The
acceptable pulse rate is up to 5 kHz. (DC input type only)
Built-in analog setting adjusters:
Two analog setting adjusters are provided on the T1-16S. This allows operators to
adjust time or other control parameters easily using a screwdriver.
High speed processing:
Sophisticated machine control applications require high speed data manipulations.
The T1-16S is designed to meet these requirements.
• 1.4 µs per contact
• 2.3 µs per coil
• 4.2 µs per 16-bit transfer
• 6.5 µs per 16-bit addition
The T1-16S also supports interrupt input function (DC input type only). This allows
immediate operation independent of program scan.
High performance software:
The T1-16S offers 21 basic ladder instructions and 97 function instructions.
Subroutines, Interrupt functions, Indirect addressing, For/Next loops, Pre-derivative
real PID, etc. are standard on the T1-16S. These functions allow the T1-16S to be
applied to the most demanding control applications.
Battery-less operation:
The T1-16S has a standard built-in EEPROM, permitting operation without need of a
battery. Also, the variable data can be written into and/or read from the EEPROM,
providing completely maintenance-free back-up operation.
This function is an important feature for OEMs, because it can eliminate the need for
changing the battery every few years.
(Optional battery is also available to back-up real-time clock and retentive data)

16

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration
Pulse output / PWM output:
One point of variable frequency pulses (max. 5 kHz) or variable duty pulses can be
output. These functions can be used to drive a stepping motor or to simulate an
analog output. (DC input type only)
Built-in computer link function:
The T1-16S’s RS-232C programmer port can accept the computer link protocol (data
read/write). This results in easy connection to a higher level computer, an operator
interface unit, etc.
The parity setting of the programmer port can be selected either odd or none. The
none parity mode is provided especially for telephone modem connection. Using
modems, remote programming/monitoring is available.
Real-time control data link network:
By connecting the TOSLINE-F10 remote module (FR112M) to the T1 -16S, highspeed data link network can be established. In this network, upper T-series PLC
model (T2/T2E/T2N or T3/T3H) works as master and up to 16 T1-16Ss can be
connected as remote. Each T1-16S can exchange data with the master through 1
word input and 1 word output. The transmission speed can be selected either 750
kbps or 250 kbps.
Sampling trace function:
The sampling trace is the function to collect the user specified data every user
specified timing (minimum every scan), and to display the collected data on the
programmer screen in time chart and/or trend graph format. This function is useful
for checking the input signals changing.
Password protection:
By registering your passwords, four levels of protection is available according to the
security levels required for your application.
Level 4: Reading/writing program and writing data are prohibited
Level 3: Reading/writing program are prohibited
Level 2: Writing program is prohibited
Level 1: No protection (changing passwords is available only in this level)
Two points of solid-state output:
Each model of the T1-16S has two points of solid-state output (transistors for DC
input type and triacs for AC input type). These solid-state outputs are suitable for
frequent switching application.

Basic Hardware and Function

17

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration
DIN rail mounting:
The T1-16S is equipped with brackets for mounting on a standard 35 mm DIN rail.
The T1-16S can be mounted on a DIN rail as well as screw mounting.
On-line program changes:
When the T1-16S’s memory mode is set to 4 k steps mode, on-line (in RUN mode)
program changes are available. Furthermore, program writing into the built-in
EEPROM is also available in RUN mode. These functions are useful in program
debugging stage.
Real-time clock/calendar function: (Enhanced model only)
The T1-16S has the real-time-clock/calendar function (year, month, day, day of the
week, hours, minutes, seconds) that can be used for performing scheduled
operations, data gathering with time stamps, etc. To back-up the real-time
clock/calendar data, use of the optional battery is recommended.
RS-485 multi-purpose communication port: (Enhanced model only)
The T1-16S has an RS-485 multi-purpose communication port. Using this port, one
of the following communication modes can be selected.
• Computer link mode: T-series computer link protocol can be used in this mode.
Up to 32 T1-16Ss can be connected to a master computer. By using this mode,
MMI/SCADA system can be easily configured.
• Data link mode: Two PLCs (any combination of T1S, T2E or T2N) can be
directly linked together. This direct link is inexpensive, easily configured and
requires no special programming.
• Free ASCII mode: User defined ASCII messages can be transmitted and
received through this port. A terminal, printer, bar-code reader, or other serial
ASCII device can be directly connected.
• Inverter connection mode: This mode is specially provided to communicate with
Toshiba Inverters (ASDs) VF-A7/G7/S9 series. By using this function, the T1-16S
can control and monitor the connected Inverters.

18

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration
1.3 System configuration
The following figure shows the T1-16S system configuration.

MMI/SCADA
system

Peripheral tool

IBM-PC compatible
personal computer

Inverter

IBM-PC compatible
personal computer

RS485 (Standard type only)

T-PDS
software

T1-16S basic unit
T1-16S
Handy programmer
HP911A

RS232C

I/O modules

Computer link function
MMI/SCADA
system

8 modules max.

Basic Hardware and Function

19

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration
1.4 I/O expansion
The T1-16S provides I/O expandability by connecting the I/O modules. Up to eight
I/O modules can be connected.
Available I/O modules
DI116M:
DO116M:
DD116M:
RO108M:
AD121M:
AD131M:
DA121M:
DA131M:
TC111M:
FR112M:

16 points DC input
16 points DC output
8 points DC input + 8 points DC output
8 points relay output
1 channel analog input (0 to 5V or 0 to 20mA)
1 channel analog input (-10 to +10V)
1 channel analog output (0 to 20mA)
1 channel analog output (-10 to +10V)
1 channel thermocouple input (type K, J, E, or ±50mV)
TOSLINE-F10 remote station

T1-16S maximum configuration
T1-16S
main unit

Up to 8 I/O modules

NOTE

20

(1) The 5Vdc power to the I/O modules is supplied from the main unit. The main
unit can supply maximum 1.5A of the 5Vdc power to the I/O modules. Check
the current consumption of each I/O module used. Refer to section 2.1.
(2) The connecting order of the I/O modules is not restricted except TOSLINEF10 remote station FR112M. When the FR112M is used, it must be the right
end module.
(3) If more than 8 I/O modules are connected, the T1-16S cannot operate
normally.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration
1.5 Components
1.5.1

Basic unit
The T1-16S is available in four types as shown in the following table.

Type
Link/ Calendar Power supply
Input
Output
T1-MDR16SS
100-240 Vac, 8 points - 24 Vdc 6 points - relay,
Yes
(Enhanced model)
50/60 Hz
2 points - transistor
T1-MDR16SC
No
(Standard model)
T1-MDR16SSD
24 Vdc
Yes
(Enhanced model)
T1-MDR16SCD
No
(Standard model)

Link terminals
(Enhanced model only)

Operation status LEDs
I/O status LEDs (Low side)

Mounting hole
Programmer
port cover
Battery holder
cover

Power supply and
input/output terminals

Expantion
connector

I/O status LEDs (High side)

Basic Hardware and Function

21

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration
♦ Behind the programmer port cover

Programmer port connector
Analog setting adjusters
(V0 and V1)
PRG

V0

V1
H/R

Mode control switch
(HALT / RUN)
Battery holder
Battery type: CR2032
(Optional)
A tab for battery eject

Power supply terminals:
Connect the power cable and grounding wire. The terminal screw size is M3.
See sections 4.4 and 4.5 for wiring.
Input terminals:
Connect input signal wires. The terminal screw size is M3. See section 2.4 for
details.
Output terminals:
Connect output signal wires. The terminal screw size is M3. See section 2.4 for
details.

22

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration
I/O status LEDs:
Indicates the ON/OFF status of each I/O signal. (color: red)
SW54 setting
I/O intending for an indication
value
0 (default)
Basic unit (L: X000-007, H: Y020-027)
1
I/O module slot 0
2
I/O module slot 1
3
I/O module slot 2
4
I/O module slot 3
5
I/O module slot 4
6
I/O module slot 5
7
I/O module slot 6
8
I/O module slot 7
9
TOSLINE-F10 (FR112M), Low 1 word
10
TOSLINE-F10 (FR112M), High 1 word
Others
Basic unit (L: X000-007, H: Y020-027)

Note

It indicates these at the
time of only RUN
mode.

Operation status LEDs:
Indicates the operation status of the T1-16S.

FLT
RUN
PWR

PWR
(Power) (green)
RUN
(green)

FLT
(Fault)

(red)

Lit
Not lit
Lit
Blinking
Not lit
Lit
Blinking
Not lit

Internal 5 Vdc power is normal.
Internal 5 Vdc power is not normal.
RUN mode (in operation)
HOLD mode
HALT mode or ERROR mode
ERROR mode
Hardware error (programmer cannot be connected)
Normal

Mode control switch:
Controls the operation modes of the T1-16S.
H (HALT)

R (RUN)

When the switch is turned to H (HALT) side, the T1-16S stops
program execution (HALT mode). In this position, RUN/HALT
command from the programmer is disabled.
When the switch is turned to R (RUN) side, the T1-16S starts
program execution. This is the position during normal operation.
In this position, RUN/HALT command from the programmer is also
available.

Basic Hardware and Function

23

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration
Analog setting adjusters:
Two analog setting adjusters are provided. The V0 value is stored in SW30 and the
V1 value is stored in SW31. The converted value range is 0 to 1000. Refer to section
8.5 for details of the analog setting function.
Programmer port connector:
Used to connect the programmer cable. The interface is RS-232C. This port can also
be used for the computer link function. Refer to section 1.6 for more information
about the computer link function.
Expansion connector:
Used to connect the I/O module.
RS-485 port (Enhanced model only):
Used to connect a computer (SCADA system), operator interface unit, other T1-16S,
or many kinds of serial ASCII devices including Toshiba’s Inverter through RS-485
interface. Refer to section 1.7 for more information about the T1-16S’s RS-485 multipurpose communication functions.
Mounting holes:
Used to fix the T1-16S on a mounting frame by screws. The mounting holes are
provided at two opposite corners.

T1

Use two M4 screws for mounting. See section 4.2 for
installing the unit.

DIN rail bracket:
The DIN rail bracket is provided at the rear for mounting the T1-16S on a 35 mm DIN
rail. See section 4.2 for installing the unit.

24

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration
1.5.2

I/O modules
The T1-16S can connect up to eight I/O modules.
The following 10 types of the I/O modules are available.
For specification details of the I/O modules, refer to the separate manual “T1-16S
User’s Manual − I/O Modules −“.
Type
DI116M
DO116M
DD116M
RO108M
AD121M
AD131M
DA121M
DA131M
TC111M
FR112M

Description
16 points input, 24Vdc – 5mA
16 points output, 24Vdc – 100mA
8 points input, 24Vdc - 5mA
+ 8 points output, 24Vdc – 100mA
8 points relay output, 24Vdc/240Vac - 1A
1 channel analog input, 0 to 5V / 0 to 20mA
1 channel analog input, ±10V
1 channel analog output, 0 to 20mA
1 channel analog output, ±10V
1 channel thermo-couple input
TOSLINE-F10 remote station,
1 word input + 1 word output
FR112M

Expantion connector
NOTE

Power supply
Supplied from the
basic unit (5 Vdc)

Other I/O modules

Expantion connectors

(1) If more than 8 I/O modules are connected, T1-16S cannot operate normally.
(2) The TOSLINE-F10 remote station module (FR112M) must be connected at the
right end. Tow or more FR112Ms cannot be used together.

Basic Hardware and Function

25

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration
1.5.3

Options
The following optional items are available.
Item
Cable for
programming tool
Programmer port
connector
Option card I/O
connector
Back-up battery

26

T1-16S User’s Manual

Type

Description

CJ105

For T-PDS, 5 m length

PT16S

For RS-232C computer link, with 2 m cable

PT15S
PT15F
CR2032

Cable side connector for
Soldering type
DI116M, DO116M, or DD116M
Flat cable type
For memory back up. (Available on the market.)

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration
1.6 Programmer port function
The interface of the T1-16S’s programmer port is RS-232C. Normally this port is
used to connect the programmer. However, this port can also be used for the
computer link function.
The computer link is a data communication function between computer or operator
interface unit and the T1-16S. The data in the T1-16S can be read and written by
creating simple communication program on the computer. The computer link protocol
of the T1-16S is published in “T1-16S User’s Manual − Communication Function −”.
Item
Interface
Transmission system
Synchronization
Transmission speed
Transmission distance
Framing

Protocol
Transmission delay option

Specifications
Conforms to RS-232C
Half-duplex
Start-stop system (asynchronous)
9600 bps (fixed)
15 m max.
Start bit:
1 bit
Data bits:
8 bits (fixed)
Parity:
Odd or none
Stop bit:
1 bit (fixed)
T-series computer link (ASCII)
Programmer (binary)
0 to 300 ms

By using the multi-drop adapter (CU111), multiple T1-16Ss can be connected on an
RS-485 line. The T-series PLC programming software (T-PDS) can also be used in
this configuration.

Master Computer

Operator Interface

RS-232C

RS-485 (1 km max.)
Max. 32 T1-16Ss
C
U

T1-16S

C
U
T1-16S

C
U
T1-16S

T1-16S

Basic Hardware and Function

27

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration
1.7 RS-485 port communication function
The T1-16S enhanced model has an RS-485 multi-purpose communication port.
This port can work independent of the programmer port.
By using this communication port, one of the following four communication modes is
available, computer link mode, data link mode, free ASCII mode, and Inverter
connection mode.
For details of these functions, refer to the separate manual “T1-16S User’s Manual −
Communication Function −”.
Item
Interface
Transmission system
Synchronization
Transmission code
Transmission speed
Transmission
distance
Framing

Protocol

Link configuration

Computer
Free ASCII
Inverter
link
connection
Conforms to RS-458
Half-duplex
Start-stop system (asynchronous)
ASCII/binary ASCII
Binary
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or
19200 bps
1 km max.
Start bit:
1 bit
Data bits: 7 or 8 bits
Parity:
Odd, even, or none
Stop bit:
1 or 2 bits
T-series
User
Inverter VFcomputer
defined
A7/G7/S9
link (ASCII), ASCII
binary
protocol
Programmer messages
(binary)
1-to-N
N/A
1-to-N

NOTE

T1-16S standard model does not have the RS-485 interface.

28

T1-16S User’s Manual

Data link

Binary
19200 bps
(fixed)
Special

Special

1-to-1

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration
Computer link mode
T-series computer link protocol can be used in this mode. A maximum of 32 T1-16Ss
can be connected to a master computer.
By using this mode, all the T1-16S’s data can be accessed by a master computer.
The T-series PLC programming software (T-PDS) can also be used in this
configuration.
Master Computer

RS-485 (1 km max.)

T1-16S

T1-16S

T1-16S

Max. 32 T1-16Ss

T1-16S

Data link mode
Two PLCs (any combination of T1-16S, T2E or T2N) can be directly linked together.
This direct link is inexpensive, easily configured and requires no special
programming. Data registers D0000 to D0031 are used for the data transfer.
T1S

T1-16S

T1

RS-485 (1 km max.)
Station No. 1

Station No. 2

D0000

D0000

D0015
D0016

D0015
D0016

D0031

D0031

Basic Hardware and Function

29

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration
Free ASCII mode
The free ASCII mode is used to connect between the T1-16S and various serial
ASCII devices, such as a micro computer, bar code reader, printer, display, etc.
By using this mode, the T1-16S can work as a communication master. Therefore, the
T1-16S can communicate with other PLCs using the computer link protocol.

T1-16S
RS-485 (1 km max.)

• Bar-code reader
• ID system
• Weigh scale
• Power meter
• Printer
• Others

30

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration
Free ASCII mode
The T1-16S's Inverter connection mode is a special function to monitor/control the
Toshiba Inverters (ASDs) VF-A7/G7/S9 through the RS-485 line.
Using this mode, the T1-16S can perform the following functions for the Inverters
connected on the RS-485 line without any special communication program.
• Monitoring − Operating frequency and Terminal status
• Control − Run/Stop/Jog, Forward/Reverse, Frequency reference, etc.
• Parameter read/write
• Broadcast command

T1-16S

RS-485 (1 km max.)

RS485 adapter

888

888

888

VF-A7

VF-A7

VF-S9

888

VF-S9

888

VF-S9

888

VF-S9

(Max. 64 Inverters)

Basic Hardware and Function

31

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration
1.8 Real-time data link system
TOSLINE-F10
TOSLINE-F10 is a high speed data transmission system suited for small points I/O
distribution system. By inserting the TOSLINE-F10 remote module (FR112M), the
T1-16S can work as a remote station of the TOSLINE-F10 network. On this network,
the T1-16S sends 1 word data to the master station and receives 1 word data from
the master station.
Item

TOSLINE-F10 system specifications
High speed mode
Long distance mode
Bus (terminated at both ends)
500 m max. (total)
1 km max. (total)

Topology
Transmission distance
(without repeater)
Transmission speed
Scan transmission
capacity
Scan cycle
Error checking
NOTE

750 kbps
250 kbps
512 points (32 words) max.
7 ms/32 words
CRC check

12 ms/32 words

(1) Refer to the separate “T1 User’s Manual − Option Card and I/O
Module −“ for details of the TOSLINE-F10 remote card (FR112).
(2) Refer to the separate TOSLINE-F10 User’s Manual for details of
overall TOSLINE-F10 system.

Typical data link configuration
The figure below shows the typical data link configuration.
Master
computer

T2E
(master)

TOSLINE-F10

T1-16S

T1-16S

T1-16S

T2E
(remote)

RI/O

RI/O

RI/O: remote I/O
Operator interface units

32

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration
1.9 Peripheral tools
The following peripheral tools are available for the T1-16S.

T-Series Program Development System (T-PDS)
The T-Series Program Development System (T-PDS) is a software which runs on
any IBM-PC compatible personal computers such as Toshiba’s Notebook computers.
The same T-PDS software supports on-line/off-line programming, debugging and
program documentation for all the T-Series programmable controllers T1/T1S,
T2/T2E/T2N, T3/T3H and S2T.
• User-friendly program editor includes cut & paste, address search & replace,
program block move/copy, etc.
• Group programming − part program development by multiple designers and
merging them into a complete program − enhance the software productivity.
• Powerful monitoring, I/O force and data set functions fully support your program
debugging.
• Documentation of programs with commentary makes your maintenance work
easy.
• Remote monitoring/programming via modem (radio/phone) is possible.

The table below shows the T-PDS versions that support the T1-16S.
Type
T-PDS for Windows
T-PDS for MS-DOS

Part number
TMW33E1SS
TMM33I1SS

Versions available for
T1-16/28/40
T1-40S/T1-16S
*1)
Ver 1.0 or later
Ver 1.2 or later
*1)
Ver 1.61 or later
Ver 2.1 or later

*1) The T1-16S can be used with these versions. However, in this case, there are
the following functional limitations.
• The program size setting is only available as 2 k. It is set to 4 k mode in the
T1-16S.
• Some of the added instructions (MAVE, DFL, HTOA, ATOH) may not be
edited/monitored. (depending on the version)

NOTE

The connection cable for the T1-16S is different from that for upper T-Series
PLCs. These cables are supplied separately.
Connection cable for T1-16S ... Type: CJ105, 5 m length
Connection cable for T2/T3 …. Type: CJ905, 5 m length

Basic Hardware and Function

33

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration
T-Series Handy Programmer (HP911A)
The HP911A is a hand-held programmer, that can be used to program the T1-16S
using ladder diagram. Its portability makes it ideal for maintenance use at remote
locations.
The HP911A has the following features.
• The HP911A supports ladder diagram programming of T-Series programmable
controllers T1-16S, T2/T2E/T2N and T3.
• Built-in EEPROM allows program copy between T-Series controllers.
• Two display modes are available,
- Normal: 5 lines and 12 columns
- Zoom: Full device description
• On-line data set and I/O force are useful for system checking.
• Backlit LCD display allows operation in dim light.

There are two types of the Handy Programmer (HP911) depending on the cable
included with.
Type
HP911A
HP911

Part number
THP911A∗S
THP911∗∗S

Cable included with Versions available for T1-16S
2 m cable for T1-16S Ver 1.1 or later
2 m cable for the upper Ver 1.1 or later
T-series PLCs

The T1-16S can be used with the HP911(A). However, there are the following
functional limitations.
• The program size setting is only available as 2 k. It is set to 4 k mode in the T116S.
• Some of the added instructions (MAVE, DFL, HTOA, ATOH) cannot be
edited/monitored.

NOTE

34

A 2 m connection cable for the T1-16S (Type: CJ102) is supplied with the
HP911A. The cable for the T2/T3 is available separately. (Type: CJ902, 2 m
length)

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration
Program Storage Module (RM102)
The program storage module (RM102) is an
external memory for storing the T1-16S
program. By using the RM102, program saving
from the T1-16S to the RM102, and program
loading from the RM102 to the T1-16S can be
done without need of a programmer.
Because the RM102 has an EEPROM,
maintenance-free program storage and quick
saving/loading are available.

Multi-drop adapter (CU111)
The T1-16S’s RS-232C programmer port
supports the computer link function.
When two or more T1-16Ss are connected with
a master computer, the multi-drop adapter
(CU111) can be used. (One-to-N configuration)
The CU111 is an RS-232C/RS-485 converter
specially designed for the T1-16S’s
programmer port.

Basic Hardware and Function

35

6F3B0253

36

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Section 2
Specifications

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4

General specifications, 38
Functional specifications, 40
I/O specifications, 42
External dimensions, 46

Basic Hardware and Function

37

6F3B0253

2. Specifications

DC Power type

AC Power type

2.1 General specifications
Item
Power supply voltage
Power consumption
Inrush current
Output 24Vdc
rating
(24Vdc, ±10%)
(Note) 5Vdc

T1-16S
100 to 240Vac (+10/-15%), 50/60 Hz
45VA or less
50A or less (at 240Vac, cold start)
0.2A (for external devices and/or for input signals)

Power supply voltage

24Vdc (+20/-15%)

Power consumption

18W or less

Inrush current

25A or less (at 24Vdc)

5Vdc output rating (Note)

1.5A (for I/O module)

Retentive power interruption
Insulation resistance
Withstand voltage
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Noise immunity
Vibration immunity
Shock immunity
Approximate weight

10ms or less
10MΩ or more
(between power terminals and ground terminal)
1500Vac - 1 minute
0 to 55°C (operation), -20 to 75°C (storage)
5 to 95%RH, no condensation
1000Vp-p/1µs, Conform to EMC Directive 89/336/EEC
2
9.8m/s (1g)
(for 30 minutes per axis, on 3 mutually perpendicular axes)
2
98m/s (10g)
(3 shocks per axis, on 3 mutually perpendicular axes)
500g

(1) 24Vdc service power output is not provided on the DC power supply type.
(2) The maximum output current of the 5Vdc is 1.5A. However there is the following
restrictions, depending on the conditions.
• When HP911 is used:
→ Redused by 0.2A
• When RS-485 port is used:
→ Reduced by 0.1A
• When 24Vdc service power is used:
→ Refer to the right chart.

38

T1-16S User’s Manual

5Vdc
maximum load current

NOTE

1.5A (for I/O module)

(A)
1.5
1.0

0.1
0.2 (A)
24Vdc service power

6F3B0253

2. Specifications
NOTE

(3) The 5Vdc current consumption of each I/O modules is described below.
Check that the total 5Vdc current consumption is within the limit.
Model

Specifications

DI116M
DO116M
DD116M

16points, 24Vdc-5mA input.
16points, 24Vdc-100mA output.
8points, 24Vdc-5mA input.
8points, 24Vdc-100mA output.
8 points, 24Vdc/240Vac – 1A relay output
1ch. 12bit analog input.
(0 to 20mA, 0 to 5V)
1ch. 12bit analog input. (±10V)
1ch. 12bit analog output.
(0 to 20mA, 0 to 5V)
1ch. 12bit analog output. (±10V)
1ch. 12bit thermo couple input.
TOSLINE-F10 remote station.

RO108M
AD121M
AD131M
DA121M
DA131M
TC111M
FR112M

5Vdc consumer
current
50mA
50mA
50mA
260mA
260mA
260mA
350mA
240mA
400mA
100mA

Basic Hardware and Function

39

6F3B0253

2. Specifications
2.2 Functional specifications
Item
Control method
Scan system
I/O update

T1-16S
Stored program, cyclic scan system
Floating scan or constant scan (10 – 200ms, 10ms units)
Batch I/O refresh
(direct I/O instruction available at basic unit ’s I/O)
Program memory (Note)
RAM and EEPROM (no back-up battery required)
Program capacity
8K steps
(4K or 8K mode)
Programming language
Ladder diagram with function block
Instructions
Basic: 21
Function: 97
Execution speed
1.4µs/contact, 2.3µs/coil,
4.2µs/16-bit transfer, 6.5µs/16-bit addition
Program types
1 main program
1 sub-program (initial program)
1 timer interrupt (interval: 5 to 1000ms, 5ms units)
4 I/O interrupt (high-speed counter and interrupt input)
256 subroutines (up to 3 levels of nesting)
User data I/O register
512 points/ 32 words (X/XW, Y/YW)
Auxiliary relay 4096 points/ 256 words (R/RW)
Special relay
1024 points/ 64 words (S/SW)
Timer
256 points (T./T)
64 at 0.01s, 192 at 0.1s
Counter
256 points (C./C)
Data register
4096 words (D)
Index register
3 words (I, J, K)
Memory Capacitor
1 hour (at 25°C)
back-up Battery (option) Max. 2 years.
Min. 6 months. (Note)

NOTE

(1) The user program stored in the EEPROM is transferred to the RAM
when power is turned on. Therefore, if the program is modified, it is
necessary to issue the EEPROM Write command from the programming
tool. Otherwise, the modified program is over-written by original
EEPROM contents at the next initial load timing.
(2) The data of RAM and calendar IC are backed up by built-in capacitor
and optional battery.
(3) When the optional battery is used, replace the battery periodically with
referring to the table below.

Operation
time per day

40

T1-16S User’s Manual

Over 8 hours
Under 8 hours

Annual average air temperature
Under 30°C (86°F)
Over 30°C (86°F)
2 years
1 year
1 year
6 months

6F3B0253

2. Specifications
Functional specifications (cont’d)
Item
I/O capacity

T1-16S
16 points (basic)
+128 points (I/O modules)
I/O type
Input
24Vdc input (8 points)
Output
Relay (6 points) + transistor (2 points)
I/O terminal block
Fixed
Real-time clock
Yes, ±60 s/month at 25°C
/calendar
(Enhanced model only)
Special I/O functions • High speed counter, 2 single or 1 quadrature
(Note)
• Interrupt input, 2 points
• Adjustable analog register, 2 points
• Pulse output, CW+CCW or pulse+direction
• PWM output
Communications
• 1 port RS-232C (programmer port)
interface
- for Programmer or Computer link connection
• 1 port RS-485 (Enhanced model only)
- Programmer
- Computer link
- Data link
- Free ASCII
• TOSLINE-F10 remote (by I/O module)
Debug support
• Sampling trace, 8 devices and 3 register - 256 times
function
• On-line programming
• On-line EEPROM write

NOTE

(1) High-speed counter, interrupt input, pulse output and PWM output are
available in the DC input types.
(2) High-speed counter and interrupt input cannot be used simultaneously.
(3) Pulse output and PWM output cannot be used simultaneously.

Basic Hardware and Function

41

6F3B0253

2. Specifications
2.3 I/O specifications
• Input specifications
Item
Input type
Number of input points
Rated input voltage
Rated input current
Min. ON voltage
Max. OFF voltage
ON delay time
OFF delay time
Input signal display
External connection
Withstand voltage

Specifications
DC input, current source/sink
8 points (8 points/common)
24Vdc, +10/-15 %
7mA (at 24Vdc)
15Vdc
5Vdc
*1
0 to 15ms
*1
0 to 15ms
LED display for all points, lit at ON, internal logic
side
Removable terminal block, M3
1500Vac, 1 minute
(between internal and external circuits)

Internal circuit

LED

7

Internal circuit

0

C

*1: User can change the input ON/OFF delay time of the DC input.
The setting range is 0 to 15ms. (Default value = 10ms) Refer to section 8.2.

42

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

2. Specifications
• Input signal connections

T1-16S
DC IN

L

− C 1 3 5 7 Vin 21 23 25 27
N NC + 0 2 4 6 C 20 22 24 26 C

Service power
24Vdc
24Vdc
24Vdc input

NOTE

The 24Vdc service power output is not provided on the DC power supply type.

Basic Hardware and Function

43

6F3B0253

2. Specifications
• Output specifications
Item

Specifications
Relay output
Transistor output
Output type
Relay contact, normally open
Transistor output, current sink
Number of output points 6 points
2 points
(6 pts/common)
(2 points/common)
Rated load voltage
240Vac/24Vdc (max.)
24Vdc
Range of load voltage
Max. 264Vac/125Vdc
20.0 - 28.0Vdc
Maximum load current 2A/point (resistive),
0.5A/point (resistive)
4A/common
ON resistance
50mΩ or less
−
(initial value)
Voltage drop at ON
0.5V or less
−
Leakage current at OFF None
0.1mA or less
Minimum load
5Vdc, 10mA
−
(50mW)
ON delay time
10ms or less
0.1ms or less
OFF delay time
10ms or less
0.1ms or less
Input signal display
LED display for all points, lit at ON, internal logic side
External connection
Removable terminal block, M3
Withstand voltage
1500Vac, 1 minute (between internal and external circuits)
Internal circuit

LED
Ry

22
27
C

Internal circuit

Internal circuit

LED

Vin
20
21
C

*1: The switching life of the relay output is as follows.
20 million times or more (mechanical)
100 thousand times or more (electrical, at maximum rated voltage and current)

44

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

2. Specifications
• Output signal connections

T1-16S
DC OUT

L

RELAY OUT

− C 1 3 5 7 Vin 21 23 25 27
N NC + 0 2 4 6 C 20 22 24 26 C

Service power
24Vdc

PS

24Vdc +
Transister output

240Vac/24Vdc (max.)

PS

Relay output

Basic Hardware and Function

45

6F3B0253

2. Specifications
2.4 External dimensions
♦ T1-16S

[mm]
♦ I/O module

[mm]

46

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Section 3
I/O Application Precautions

3.1
3.2

Application precautions for input signals, 48
Application precautions for output signals, 50

Basic Hardware and Function

47

6F3B0253

3. I/O Application Precautions
3.1 Application precautions for input signals

! WARNING

Configure emergency stop and safety interlocking circuits outside the
T1-16S. Otherwise, malfunction of the T1-16S can cause injury or serious
accidents.

(1) Minimum ON/OFF time of the input signal
The following conditions guarantee correct reading of the ON/OFF state of the input
signal:
Input ON time: ON delay time + the time for one scan
Input OFF time: OFF delay time + the time for one scan
The ON and OFF times of the input signals must be longer than these intervals.
(2) Increasing the contact current
The reliability of some contacts cannot be guaranteed by the specified input current. In
this case, install an external bleeder resistor to increase the contact current.
Bleeder resistor

I
V

I1
R
I2

T1
input
circuit

R=

V
I − I1

Wattage >

V2
×3
R

(3) Connecting transistor output device
An example of connecting a transistor output device to T1-16S’s input circuit is shown
below.
• For NPN open collector

• For PNP open collector
C

C

48

T1-16S User’s Manual

T1
input
circuit

T1
input
circuit

6F3B0253

3. I/O Application Precautions
(4) Countermeasures against leakage current
When a switch with an LED or sensor is used, the input sometimes cannot recognize
that the switch is off due to the current leakage. In this case, install a bleeder resistor
to reduce input impedance.
LE

Bleeder resistor

C

T1
input
circuit

Select a bleeder resistor according to the following criteria:
(a) The voltage between the input terminals must be lower than the OFF voltage
when the sensor is switched off.
(b) The current must be within the allowable range when the sensor is switched on.
(c) Calculate the wattage of the bleeder resistor by multiplying the current when the
sensor is switched on times three.

Basic Hardware and Function

49

6F3B0253

3. I/O Application Precautions
3.2 Application precautions for output signals

! WARNING

Configure emergency stop and safety interlocking circuits outside the
T1-16S. Otherwise, malfunction of the T1-16S can cause injury or serious
accidents

! CAUTION

1. Turn on power to the T1-16S before turning on power to the loads.
Failure to do so may cause unexpected behavior of the loads.
2. Configure the external circuit so that the external 24Vdc power required
for the transistor output circuits and power to the loads are switched
on/off simultaneously. Also, turn off power to the loads before turning off
power to the T1-16S.
3. Install fuses appropriate to the load current in the external circuits for the
outputs. Failure to do so can cause fire in case of load over-current.

(1) 2 points of solid-state output
The leading 2 points of output (Y020 and Y021) are solid-state outputs, transistors on
the DC input types.
These solid-state outputs are suited for frequent switching applications.
Note that the specifications of the solid-state outputs and other outputs (relays) are
different.
(2) Switching life of output relays
Expected relay life is more than 100,000 electrical cycles at rated maximum voltage
and current, and more than 20 million mechanical cycles. The expected contact life
(electrical cycles) is shown on the table below.
Load
voltage
AC 110Vac,
load COSφ = 1
110Vac,
COSφ = 0.7
220Vac,
COSφ = 1
220Vac,
COSφ = 0.7

50

T1-16S User’s Manual

Load Expected life
current (thousand)
2A
340
1A
720
0.5A
1,600
2A
150
1A
320
0.5A
700
2A
220
1A
500
0.5A
1,100
2A
100
1A
210
0.5A
460

Load
voltage
DC 24Vdc,
load L/R = 0 ms
24Vdc,
L/R = 15 ms
48Vdc,
L/R = 0 ms
48Vdc,
L/R = 15 ms
110Vdc,
L/R = 0 ms
110Vdc,
L/R = 15 ms

Load Expected life
current (thousand)
2A
280
1A
600
0.5A
1,300
2A
60
1A
150
0.5A
350
1A
200
0.5A
420
0.5A
130
0.2A
420
0.5A
200
0.2A
550
0.2A
150
0.1A
350

6F3B0253

3. I/O Application Precautions
(3) Over-current protection
The output circuit of the T1-16S does not contain protective fuses. Fuses rated for the
output should be provided by the user.

Load

T1
output

Load
PS
Fuse appropriate to
the common current

(4) Output surge protection
Where an inductive load is connected to the output, a relatively high energy transient
voltage will be generated when the relay turns OFF. To prevent the problems caused
by this surge, install a surge absorber in parallel to the inductive load.

T1
output
circuit

Load
Surge absorber

PS

Surge absorber:
• Flywheel diode (for DC output)

Inverse withstand voltage: At least three times that of the power supply
Forward current: Larger than the load current
• Varistor (for AC output)

The voltage rating is 1.2 times the maximum (peak) voltage of the power supply
• CR snubber (for DC or AC output)

R: 0.5 to 1Ω per volt coil voltage
C: 0.5 to 1µF per ampere of coil current (non-polarity capacitor)

Basic Hardware and Function

51

6F3B0253

52

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Section 4
Installation and Wiring

4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6

Environmental conditions, 54
Installing the unit, 55
Wiring terminals, 57
Grounding, 58
Power supply wiring, 59
I/O wiring, 61

Basic Hardware and Function

53

6F3B0253

4. Installation and Wiring
4.1 Environmental conditions

! CAUTION

Excess temperature, humidity, vibration, shocks, or dusty and corrosive
gas environment can cause electrical shock, fire or malfunction.
Install and use the T1-16S and related equipment in the environment
described in this section.

Do not install the T1-16S in the following locations:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Where the ambient temperature drops below 0°C or exceeds 55°C.
Where the relative humidity drops below 20% or exceeds 90%.
Where there is condensation due to sudden temperature changes.
In locations subject to vibration that exceeds tolerance.
In locations subject to shock that exceeds tolerance.
Where there are corrosive or flammable gases.
In locations subject to dust, machining debris or other particles.
In locations exposed to direct sunlight.

Observe the following precautions when installing enclosures in which the T1-16S will
be installed:
• Provide the maximum possible distance from high-voltage or high-power panels.
This distance must be at least 200mm.
• If installing the enclosures in the vicinity of high-frequency equipment, be sure to
correctly ground the enclosures.
• When sharing the channel base with other panels, check for leakage current from
the other panels or equipment.

54

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

4. Installation and Wiring
4.2 Installing the unit

! CAUTION

1. Improper installation directions or insufficient installation can cause
fire or the units to drop. Install the T1-16S and related equipment in
accordance with the instructions described in this section.
2. Turn off power before installing or removing any units, modules,
racks or terminal blocks. Failure to do so can cause electrical shock
or damage to the T1-16S and related equipment.
3. Entering wire scraps or other foreign debris into to the T1-16S and
related equipment can cause fire or malfunction. Pay attention to
prevent entering them into the T1 and related equipment during
installation and wiring.

NOTE

The T1-16S basic unit and the I/O module come equipped with a bracket at the rear
for mounting on a 35mm DIN rail.

Installation precautions:
• Because the T1-16S is not dust-proof, install it in a dust-proof enclosure.
• Do not install the unit directly above equipment that generates a large amount of
heat, such as a heater, transformer, or large-capacity resistor.
• Do not install the unit within 200mm of high-voltage or high-power cables.
• Allow at least 70mm on all sides of the unit for ventilation.
• For safely during maintenance and operation, install the unit as far as possible from
high-voltage or power equipment. Alternatively, keep the unit separate using a
metal plate or similar separator.
• If high-frequency equipment is installed in the enclosure together with the T1-16S,
special attention is required for grounding. See section 4.4.
• Be sure to install the unit vertically with keeping the power terminals downside. Do
not install the unit horizontally or upside-down for safety reason.
• Use M4 size screws to mount the T1-16S.
(Recommended torque: 1.47N⋅m = 15Kgf⋅cm)

Upward

Mount the T1-16S on a vertical panel.
All other mounting positions are not
acceptable.

Basic Hardware and Function

55

6F3B0253

4. Installation and Wiring
Dimensions for screw mounting:

56

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

4. Installation and Wiring
4.3 Wiring terminals

! CAUTION

1. Turn off power before wiring to minimize the risk of electrical shock.
2. Exposed conductive parts of wire can cause electrical shock. Use
crimp-style terminals with insulating sheath or insulating tape to cover
the conductive parts. Also close the terminal covers securely on the
terminal blocks when wiring has been completed.
3. Turn off power before removing or replacing units, modules, terminal
blocks or wires. Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage
to the T1-16S and related equipment.

The terminal screw size of the T1-16S is M3. Use crimp-style terminals of 7mm width
or less useable for M3. The terminal block is not removable (fixed).
NOTE

For input and output signal connections, refer to sections 2.4 and 3.
T1-MDR16SS .... AC power supply model

T1-MDR16SSD.. DC power supply model

RS-485 (Enhanced model only)

RS-485 (Enhanced model only)

TXA RXA RXB
TXB TRM SG

TXA RXA RXB
TXB TRM SG

MDR16SS

MDR16SSD
DC IN

−

L

C

N NC +

NOTE

1 3 5 7
0 2 4 6

DC OUT

Vin
C

RELAY OUT

DC IN

21 23 25 27

20 22 24 26

C

+

NC C

- NC NC 0

1 3 5 7
2 4 6

DC OUT

Vin
C

RELAY OUT

21 23 25 27

20 22 24 26

C

(1) NC stands for ”no connect”. Do not use the NC terminals for wire
relaying or branching.
(2) For the connections of the RS-485 communication port (the upper
terminal block), refer to the separate manual “T1-16S User’s Manual Communication Function -.

The applicable wire size is 0.3mm 2 (22 AWG) to 1.25mm2 (16 AWG). The table below
shows the recommended wire size.
Type of signal
Power
Grounding
I/O signals

Recommended wire size
1.25mm (16 AWG)
1.25mm2 (16 AWG)
0.3mm2 (22 AWG) to 0.75mm2 (18 AWG)
2

Basic Hardware and Function

57

6F3B0253

4. Installation and Wiring
4.4 Grounding

! CAUTION

1. Turn off power before wiring to minimize the risk of electrical shock.
2. Operation without grounding may cause electrical shock or malfunction.
Connect the ground terminal on the T1-16S to the system ground.

The optimum method for grounding electronic equipment is to ground it separately
from other high-power systems, and to ground more than one units of electronic
equipment with a single-point ground.
Although the T1-16S has noise immunity to be used in industrial operating conditions,
grounding is important for safety and reliability.

Check the grounding against the following criteria.
1. The T1-16S must not become a path for a ground current. A high-frequency current
is particularly harmful.
2. Equalize the ground potentials when the expansion rack or unit is connected.
Ground the T1-16S and the expansion rack or unit at a single point.
3. Do not connect the ground of the T1-16S to that of high-power systems.
4. Do not use a ground that has unstable impedance, such as painted screws, or
ground subject to vibration.

The grounding marked terminal (see below) is provided on the T1-16S basic unit for
grounding purpose.

In case of the expansion rack is connected to the T1-16S, the rack mounting screw is
used for this purpose.

T1-16S

Mounting panel
System ground
• 1.25mm2 (16 AWG) wire should be used to connect the T1-16S and the expansion
rack/unit with the enclosure grounding bus bar.
• 100Ω or less to ground is required.

58

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

4. Installation and Wiring
4.5 Power supply wiring

! CAUTION

1. Turn off power before wiring to minimize the risk of electrical shock.
2. Applying excess power voltage to the T1-16S can cause explosion or
fire. Apply power of the specified ratings described below.

Wire the power source to the T1-16S power supply terminals.

T1-16S
Line filter

Insulation
transformer

Power source

• Power conditions:

Rated voltage
Frequency
Power consumption
Retentive power
interruption

AC power supply type
DC power supply type
100 to 240Vac, +10/-15%
24Vdc, +20/-15%
50/60Hz, ±5%
45VA or less
18W or less
Continuous operation for less than 10ms

• 1.25mm2 (16 AWG) twisted-pair cable should be used for the power cable.
• The power cable should be separated from other cables.

Basic Hardware and Function

59

6F3B0253

4. Installation and Wiring
Connections of the power supply terminals are shown below.
• AC power supply type

100-240Vac

∼
L N

100 to 240Vac
Grounding

• DC power supply type

24 Vdc

+

-

+
24Vdc
Grounding

60

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

4. Installation and Wiring
4.6 I/O wiring

! CAUTION

1. Turn off power before wiring to minimize the risk of electrical shock.
2. Exposed conductive parts of wire can cause electrical shock. Use
crimp-style terminals with insulating sheath or insulating tape to cover
the conductive parts. Also close the terminal covers securely on the
terminal blocks when wiring has been completed.
3. Turn off power before removing or replacing units, modules, terminal
blocks or wires. Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage
to the T1-16S and related equipment.

• Refer to sections 2.4 and 3 for instructions on how to properly wire the I/O
terminals.
• 0.75mm2 (18 AWG) to 0.3mm2 (22 AWG) wires are recommended for I/O signals.
• Separate the I/O signal cables from high-power cables by at least 200mm.
• If expansion rack or unit is used, separate the expansion cable from the power and
I/O signal cables by or unit at least 50mm.
• It is recommended to separate the input signal cables from output signal cables.

T1-16S

Input
signal

200mm
or more

Output
signal

High-power
cable

Basic Hardware and Function

61

6F3B0253

62

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Section 5
Operating System Overview

5.1
5.2
5.3

Operation modes, 64
About the built-in EEPROM, 66
Scanning, 69

Basic Hardware and Function

63

6F3B0253

5. Operating System Overview
5.1 Operation modes
The T1-16S has three basic operation modes, the RUN mode, the HALT mode and
the ERROR mode. The T1-16S also has the HOLD and RUN-F modes mainly for
system checking.

RUN:

The RUN mode is a normal control-operation mode.
In this mode, the T1-16S reads external signals, executes the user program
stored in the RAM, and outputs signals to the external devices according to
the user program. It is in the RUN mode that the T1-16S performs scans the
user program logic, which is the basic operation of a PLC.
Program changes and EEPROM write are possible while the T1-16S is in
the RUN mode. Refer to section 6.9.

HALT:

The HALT mode is a programming mode.
In this mode, user program execution is stopped and all outputs are
switched off.
Program loading into the T1-16S is possible only in the HALT mode.
For the standard T1, program changes and EEPROM write are possible only
when the T1 is in the HALT mode.

ERROR: The ERROR mode is a shutdown mode as a result of self-diagnosis.
The T1-16S enters the ERROR mode if internal trouble is detected by selfdiagnosis. In this mode, program execution is stopped and all outputs are
switched off. The cause of the shutdown can be confirmed by connecting
the programming tool.
To exit from the ERROR mode, execute the Error Reset command from the
programming tool, or cycle power off and then on again.

64

HOLD:

The HOLD mode is provided mainly for checking the external I/O signals.
In this mode, user program execution is stopped, with input and output
updating is executed. It is therefore possible to suspend program execution
while holding the output state. Moreover, a desired output state can be
established by setting any data by using the programming tool.

RUN-F:

The RUN-F mode is a forced RUN mode provided for program checking.
This mode is effective when using the expansion I/Os.
Deferent from the normal RUN mode, the RUN-F mode allows operation
even if the registered I/O modules are not actually mounted.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

5. Operating System Overview
The operation modes are switched by the mode control switch provided on the T1-16S
and the mode control commands issued from the programming tool.
The mode transition conditions are shown below.
(Power ON)

n

o

RUN

t s

p

HOLD

p
q
r
p

t s
RUN-F

HALT

u

ERROR

n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u

Mode control switch is in R (RUN) side.
Mode control switch is in H (HALT) side.
Mode control switch is turned to H (HALT) side, or HALT command is issued from
the programming tool.
Mode control switch is turned to R (RUN) side, or RUN command is issued from
the programming tool.
Force RUN (RUN-F) command is issued from the programming tool.
HOLD command is issued from the programming tool.
HOLD Cancel command is issued from the programming tool.
Error Reset command is issued from the programming tool.
(dotted line) Error is detected by self-diagnosis.

NOTE

The commands from the programming tool are available when the mode
control switch is in R (RUN) side.

Basic Hardware and Function

65

6F3B0253

5. Operating System Overview
5.2 About the built-in EEPROM
The T1-16S is equipped with a built-in EEPROM and a RAM as standard features.
The user program is stored in the EEPROM so that the user program can be
maintained without the need of a battery. A part of the Data register can also be
stored in the EEPROM.
The table below shows the contents stored in the built-in EEPROM.

User program
User data

Setting
information

T1-16S
Entire program (8 k steps) and System information
User specified number of Data register starting with address 0.
It is set by SW55.
D0000 - Dnnnn
(up to 2048 words)
SW36 - SW38:
Programmer port settings
SW55:
Number of Data register to be saved in the EEPROM
SW56 - SW57:
RS-485 port settings
Sampling trace setting information

The user program and the data stored in the EEPROM are transferred to the RAM
when power is turned on. Subsequent program execution is done based on the RAM
contents. Program editing is also performed on the RAM contents.

Therefore, if the program is modified, it is necessary to issue the EEPROM Write
command from the programming tool. Otherwise, the modified program is overwritten by original EEPROM contents when the power is turned off and on again.

66

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

5. Operating System Overview

EEPROM

RAM

User program
(8 k steps)
and System info

User program
(8 k steps)
and System info

Data register
(0 to 2048 words,
user setting)
Other data

c
d

Data register
(D0000 to Dnnnn,
user setting)
Other data
The rest of Data
register and
other registers

c
d

Executed when power is turned on (it is called initial load) or EEPROM Read
command is issued from the programming tool. The EEPROM Read is possible
only in the HALT mode.
Executed when EEPROM Write command is issued from the programming tool.
It is possible in either HALT or RUN mode. (See Note)

Basic Hardware and Function

67

6F3B0253

5. Operating System Overview
Special register SW55 is used to specify the number of Data registers to be stored in
the EEPROM. The allowable setting value is 0 to 2048.
The table below shows the correspondence between the SW55 value and Data
registers saved in the EEPROM.
SW55 setting
value
0
1
2
3
:
2047
2048
Others

Range of Data registers saved
in EEPROM
None
D0000 only
D0000 to D0001
D0000 to D0002
:
D0000 to D2046
D0000 to D2047
D0000 to D2047

Remarks

Default value
Regarded as 2048

When the EEPROM Write command is executed, the T1-16S checks the value of
SW55 and saves the Data registers into the EEPROM depending on the SW55 value.
The value of SW55 itself is also saved in the EEPROM.
At the initial load or the EEPROM Read command is executed, the T1-16S checks the
value for SW55 in the EEPROM and transfers the corresponding number of data to
the Data registers of the RAM.

NOTE

68

(1) The EEPROM has the life limit for writing. It is 100,000 times. Pay
attention not to exceed the limit. If the number of execution of
EEPROM Write command exceeds 100,000 times, EEPROM alarm
flag (S007) comes ON.
(2) Even in RUN mode, the EEPROM Write command can be executed.
However, in this case, only the user program is written into the
EEPROM. (D register data and setting information are not saved.)
(3) The data in the EEPROM can also be read or written by using the
program instruction (FUN236 XFER instruction).
(4) When the EEPROM writing is executed by the XFER instruction in the
user program, T1-16S does not update the internal EEPROM write
counts. Therefore the EEPROM alarm flag (S007) will not correspond
to this operation. Pay attention to the life limit of the EEPROM.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

5. Operating System Overview
5.3 Scanning
The flowchart below shows the basic internal operations performed by the T1-16S
from the time power is turned on through program execution. As the diagram shows,
executing a program consists of continuous scanning operations. One scan is a cycle
starting with the self-diagnosis and ending with the completion of peripheral support.

Power ON
Hardware check
Power-up
Initialization
(approx. 1 s)

Initial load
Register/device
initialization

Self-diagnosis

Mode
control

HALT mode

RUN mode

Register/device At the first
scan
initialization
Scan

Program check At the first
scan

Scan cycle

I/O update
Timer update

User program
execution

Peripheral
support

Basic Hardware and Function

69

6F3B0253

5. Operating System Overview
Hardware check:
Performs checking and initialization of the system ROM, the system RAM and the
peripheral LSIs.

Initial load:
Transfers the user program and user data from the EEPROM to the RAM. (Refer to
section 5.2)

Register/device initialization:
Initializes registers and devices as shown below.
Register/device
External input (X/XW)
External output (Y/YW)
Auxiliary device/register
(R/RW)
Special device/register
(S/SW)
Timer device/register
(T./T)
Counter device/register
(C./C)
Data register (D)
Index register (I, J, K)
NOTE

70

Initialization
Forced inputs are retained. Others are cleared to 0.
Forced coil devices are retained. Others are cleared to 0.
User specified retentive registers and forced coil devices
are retained. Others are cleared to 0.
Special setting data are retained. Others are cleared to 0.
User specified retentive registers are retained. Others are
cleared to 0.
User specified retentive registers are retained. Others are
cleared to 0.
User specified retentive registers are retained. Others are
cleared to 0.
Cleared to 0.

(1) When the data stored in the EEPROM (Data registers) are used, these
registers should be specified as retentive. Otherwise, these data are
transferred from EEPROM to RAM, but then cleared to 0 at the
initialization.
(2) The data in the retentive registers are stored in RAM and backed up by
built-in capacitor and by the optional battery if used. The back-up
period is 1 hours or more at 25 °C. If optional battery (CR2032) is
used, the back-up period is 1 year or more at 25 °C.
The T1-16S checks the validity of the retentive data at the power-up
initialization, and if they are not valid, sets the special device (S00F) to
ON. Therefore, check the status of S00F in the user program and
initialize the retentive registers if S00F is ON.
(3) The retentive registers can be set by the programming tool for RW, T,
C and D registers. The registers from address 0 to the designated
address for each type are set as retentive registers. Refer to the
separate manual for the programming tool for setting the retentive
registers.
(4) The input force and the forced coil are functions for program
debugging. For details, refer to section 6.7.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

5. Operating System Overview
Self-diagnosis:
Checks the proper operation of the T1-16S itself. If an error has detected and cannot
be recovered by re-tries, the T1-16S moves into ERROR mode. For the self-diagnosis
items, refer to section 10.2.

Mode control:
Checks the mode control switch status and the mode control request commands from
the programming tool.
The scan mode − floating scan or fixed-time scan − is also controlled hear.
NOTE

The floating scan:
When one scan is finished, immediately starts the next scan. The scan time
is shortest, but may vary depending on the program execution status.
Scan time

Scan time

Scan time

The fixed-time scan:
The scan operation is started every user-specified time. The time setting
range is 10 to 200 ms (10 ms units). If an actual scan needs longer time
than the setting time, it works as the floating scan.
Scan time (50 ms fixed)
(idling)

Scan time (50 ms fixed)
(idling)

Program check:
At the beginning of the RUN mode, the user program is compiled and its validity is
checked.

I/O update:
Reads the external input signals into the external input devices/registers (X/XW), and
sends the data of the external output devices/registers (Y/YW) to the external output
circuits. Then the outputs (relays, etc.) changes the states and latches until the next
I/O update timing.
The states of the forced input devices are not updated by this operation.

Timer update:
Updates the timer registers which are activated in the user program, and the timing
devices (S040 to S047).

Basic Hardware and Function

71

6F3B0253

5. Operating System Overview
User program execution:
Executes the programmed instructions from the beginning to the END instruction.
This is the essential function of the T1-16S.
In this section, only the main program execution is mentioned. For other program
types, such as timer interrupt, etc., refer to section 6.5.

Peripheral support:
Supports the communications with the programming tool or external devices
connected by the computer link function. The time for this operation is limited within
approx. 2 ms in the floating scan mode, and within allowable idling time in the fixedtime scan mode.
If the special relay S158 is set to ON, the peripheral support priority mode is selected.
In the peripheral support priority mode, the peripheral support time is not limited. As
the result, the communication response is improved although the scan time becomes
long at the time.

72

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Section 6
Programming Information

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10

Devices and registers, 74
Index modification, 86
Real-time clock/calendar, 88
I/O allocation, 89
T1-16S memory mode setting, 91
User program configuration, 92
Programming language, 98
Program execution sequence, 99
On-line debug support functions, 100
Password protection, 103

Basic Hardware and Function

73

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information
6.1 Devices and registers
The T1-16S program consists of bit-based instructions that handle ON/OFF
information, such as contact and coil instructions, and register-based (16-bit)
instructions, such as those for data transfer and arithmetic operations.
Devices are used to store the ON/OFF information of contacts and coils, and registers
are used to store 16-bit data.
Devices are divided into six types:
X
Y
R
S
T.
C.

External input devices
External output devices
Auxiliary relay devices
Special devices
Timer devices
Counter devices

Registers are divided into eight types:
XW
YW
RW
SW
T
C
D
I, J, K

External input registers
External output registers
Auxiliary relay registers
Special registers
Timer registers
Counter registers
Data registers
Index registers

Device and register numbers
X devices share the same memory area as XW registers. Device X004, for example,
represents the number 4 bit in the XW00 register.
Bit position / Number
(MSB)
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4

XW00

(LSB)
3 2 1 0

1

X004
Thus, "X004 is ON" means that bit number 4 of XW00 is 1.
Y, R, and S devices work in a similar manner.

74

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information
Addressing devices
A device number of X, Y, R and S devices consist of a register number and bit position
as follows.

X 00 4
Represents bit position 0 to F in the register.
Decimal number representing the register containing the corresponding
device.
Represents the type of device. (X, Y, R, or S)
As for the timer (T.) and the counter (C.) devices, a device number is expressed as
follows.

T. 12
Corresponding register number. (decimal number)
Represents the type of device. (T. or C.)
Dot (.) is used to identify as device.

Addressing registers
A register number except the index registers is expressed as follows.

XW 01
Register number. (decimal number)
Represents the type of register. (XW, YW, RW, SW, T, C or D)
The index registers (I, J and K) do not have the number.

J
I, J, or K

Basic Hardware and Function

75

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information
Available address range
Device/register

Symbol

External input device
External output device
External input register
External output register
Auxiliary relay device
Auxiliary relay register
Special device
Special register
Timer device
Timer register
Counter device
Counter register
Data register
Index register

X
Y
XW
YW
R
RW
S
SW
T.
T
C.
C
D
I
J
K

NOTE

T1-16S
Number of points
Address range
X000 - X31F
Total 512 points
Y020 - Y31F
XW00 - XW31
Total 32 words
YW02 - YW31
4096 points
R000 - R255F
256 words
RW000 - RW255
1024 points
S000 - S63F
64 words
SW00 - SW63
256 points
T.000 - T.255
256 words
T000 - T255
256 points
C.000 - C.255
256 words
C000 - C255
4096 words
D0000 - D4095
1 word
I (no address)
1 word
J (no address)
1 word
K (no address)

(1) 1 word = 16 bits
(2) The available data range in each register is -32768 to 32767 (H8000 to
H7FFF) except for the timer and the counter registers.
The data range of the timer register is 0 to 32767. That of the counter
register is 0 to 65535.
(3) Double-word (32 bits) data is available in two consecutive registers.
In this case, lower address register stores the lower 16 bits data.
(MSB) F -------------0 F ------------ 0 (LSB)
D0101

D0100

Upper 16bits Lower 16bits
In this manual, a double-word register is expressed by using ‘⋅’.
For example, D0101⋅D0100.

76

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information
External input devices (X)
These devices (X) indicate the ON/OFF states of external input signals through the
input circuits. External input devices can be used many times in a program.

External output devices (Y)
The external output devices (Y) store the ON/OFF signals that drive the external
devices through the output circuits. They can be used for coils in a program.

External input registers (XW)
These (XW) are 16-bit registers for storing values, which are received from the input
circuits.

External output registers (YW)
These 16-bit registers (YW) are used for storing values, which are sent to the output
circuits.

Auxiliary relay devices and registers (R/RW)
The auxiliary relay devices (R) are used to store intermediate results of sequences.
The auxiliary relay registers (RW) are used to store temporary results of function
instructions. The data in R/RW cannot be output directly to the output circuits. It is
necessary to move the data to Y/YW.
It is possible to make these registers retentive so that they retain data in the event of a
power failure. See section 5.3.

Timer devices and registers (T./T)
The timer registers (T) are used for storing the elapsed time of timer instructions, the
on-delay (TON), off-delay (TOF) and single-shot (SS) timers.
0.01 s base timers and 0.1 s base timers are provided.
Time base
0.01 s
0.1 s

T1-16S
T000 to T063
T064 to T255

The timer devices (T.) work as the output of the timer instructions.
It is possible to specify the T registers as retentive to retain their data in the event of a
power failure. See section 5.3.

Basic Hardware and Function

77

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information
Counter devices and registers (C./C)
The counter registers (C) are used for storing the count value of the counter (CNT)
and the up-down counter (U/D) instructions.
The counter devices (C.) work as the output of the counter instructions.
It is possible to specify the C registers as retentive to retain their data in the event of a
power failure. See section 5.3.

Data registers (D)
Functionally the data registers (D) are the same as auxiliary relay registers (RW)
except that the D registers cannot be used as devices.
A part of the data registers are saved in the built-in EEPROM as fixed data and
transferred into the RAM at the initial load.
The range of the data registers saved in the EEPROM can be specified by SW55.
See section 5.2.
It is possible to specify the D registers as retentive to retain their data in the event of a
power failure. See section 5.3.

Index registers (I, J, and K)
These index registers are used for indirect addressing for a register.
For example, if the value of I is 100 in the following register expression, it designates
D0100. For details, refer to section 6.2.
I
D0000

78

T1-16S User’s Manual

D0100 if I=100

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information
Special devices and registers (S/SW)
The special devices (S) and special registers (SW) are used for special purposes. See
list below.
Device/
register
S000
S001
S002
S003
S004
S005
S006
S007
S008
S009
S00A
S00B
S00C
S00D
S00E
S00F

NOTE

Name

T1/T1S operation mode

CPU error (down)
I/O error (down)
Program error (down)
EEPROM alarm (alarm)
Fixed-time scan time-over
(alarm)
−
Clock/calendar error
(alarm)
−
−
TL-F10 error (alarm)
−
Retentive data invalid
(alarm)

Function
0: Initialization
4: HOLD mode
1: HALT mode
6: ERROR mode
2: RUN mode
3: RUN-F mode
ON at error state (related to SW01)
ON at error state (related to SW02)
ON at error state (related to SW03)
ON when EEPROM write exceeds 100,000 times
ON when actual scan time is longer than the setting
time as fixed-time scan
Reserved
ON when clock/calendar data is illegal
Reserved
Reserved
ON when TOSLINE-F10 transmission error occurs
Reserved
ON when retentive data in RAM are invalid

(1) These devices are set by the T1-16S operating system. These devices
are read only for user.
(2) Devices marked as (down) are set in the ERROR mode. Therefore
these devices cannot be used in the user program.
(3) Devices marked as (alarm) are set in the normal operation mode.
These devices can be used in the user program.

Basic Hardware and Function

79

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information
Device/
register
S010
S011
S012
S013
S014
S015
S016
S017
S018
S019
S01A
S01B
S01C
S01D
S01E
S01F
S020
S021
S022
S023
S024
S025
S026
S027
S028
S029
S02A
S02B
S02C
S02D
S02E
S02F

NOTE

80

Name
System ROM error (down)
System RAM error (down)
Program memory error
(down)
EEPROM error (down)
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Watchdog timer error
(down)
−
I/O mismatch (down)
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−

Function
ON at error state
ON at error state
ON at error state
ON at error state
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
ON at error state
Reserved
ON at error state
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved

(1) These devices are set by the T1-16S operating system. These devices
are read only for user.
(2) Devices marked as (down) are set in the ERROR mode. Therefore
these devices cannot be used in the user program.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information
Device/
register
S030
S031
S032
S033
S034
S035
S036
S037
S038
S039
S03A
S03B
S03C
S03D
S03E
S03F
S040
S041
S042
S043
S044
S045
S046
S047
S048
S049
S04A
S04B
S04C
S04D
S04E
S04F
NOTE

Name
Program error
Scan time over (down)
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Timing relay 0.1 s
Timing relay 0.2 s
Timing relay 0.4 s
Timing relay 0.8 s
Timing relay 1.0 s
Timing relay 2.0 s
Timing relay 4.0 s
Timing relay 8.0 s
−
−
−
−
−
−
Always OFF
Always ON

Function
ON at error state (related to SW06)
ON when the scan time exceeds 200 ms
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
OFF 0.05 s / ON 0.05 s (0.1 s interval)
OFF 0.1 s / ON 0.1 s (0.2 s interval)
OFF 0.2 s / ON 0.2 s (0.4 s interval)
All OFF at the
OFF 0.4 s / ON 0.4 s (0.8 s interval)
beginning of
OFF 0.5 s / ON 0.5 s (1.0 s interval)
RUN mode
OFF 1.0 s / ON 1.0 s (2.0 s interval)
OFF 2.0 s / ON 2.0 s (4.0 s interval)
OFF 4.0 s / ON 4.0 s (8.0 s interval)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Always OFF
Always ON

(1) These devices are set by the T1-16S operating system. These devices
are read only for user.
(2) Devices marked as (down) are set in the ERROR mode. Therefore
these devices cannot be used in the user program.

Basic Hardware and Function

81

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information
Device/
register
S050
S051
S052
S053
S054
S055
S056
S057
S058
S059
S05A
S05B
S05C
S05D
S05E
S05F
S060
S061
S062
S063
S064
S065
S066
S067
S068
S069
S06A
S06B
S06C
S06D
S06E
S06F
NOTE

82

Name

Function

CF (carry flag)
Used for instructions which manipulate carry
ERF (instruction error flag) ON when instruction execution error is occurred
(related to alarm flags of SW06)
Reserved
−
Reserved
−
Reserved
−
Reserved
−
Reserved
−
Reserved
−
Reserved
−
Reserved
−
Reserved
−
Reserved
−
Reserved
−
Reserved
−
Reserved
−
Reserved
−
Illegal instruction (down)
ON when illegal instruction is detected
Reserved
−
Reserved
−
Reserved
−
Boundary error (alarm)
ON when illegal address is designated by indirect
addressing (operation continued)
Reserved
−
Reserved
−
Reserved
−
Division error (alarm)
ON when error occurs in division instruction (operation
continued)
BCD data error (alarm)
ON when BCD data error has detected in BCD
operation instructions (operation continued)
Table operation error
ON when table size error has detected in table
(alarm)
operation instructions (operation continued) (T1S only)
Encode error (alarm)
ON when error occurs in encode instruction (operation
continued)
Reserved
−
Reserved
−
Reserved
−
Reserved
−

(1) Devices marked as (down) are set in the ERROR mode. Therefore
these devices cannot be used in the user program.
(2) CF, ERF and devices marked as (alarm) can be reset by the user
program.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information
Device/
register
SW07

Clock/calendar (Year)

SW08
SW09
SW10
SW11
SW12
SW13

Clock/calendar
Clock/calendar
Clock/calendar
Clock/calendar
Clock/calendar
Clock/calendar

SW14
SW15
SW16

−
Peripheral support priority
Mode of special input
functions
Input filter constant
Preset values for high
speed counter

SW17
SW18
SW19
SW20
SW21
SW22
SW23
SW24

Name

(Month)
(Day)
(Hour)
(Minute)
(Second)
(Week)

Function
Lower 2 digits of the calendar year
(01, 02, ... )
Month (01, 02, ... 12)
They are stored in
Day (01, 02, ... 31)
the lower 8 bits by
Hour (00, 01, ... 59)
BCD code
Minute (00, 01, ... 59)
Second (00, 01, ... 59)
Day of the week
(Sun = 00, Mon = 01, ... Sat = 06)
Reserved
Bit 8 (S158) is used to select peripheral support priority
Used to select the special input functions
Used to set the input filter constant
Used to set the preset values for high speed counters

SW29
SW30
SW31
SW32
SW33
SW34
SW35
SW36

Count values for high
speed counter
High speed counter control
flags
−
Mode of special output
functions
Special output control flags
Special output frequency
setting
PWM output duty setting
Analog setting value 1
Analog setting value 2
−
−
TL-F10 send data
TL-F10 receive data
PRG port station address

SW37

PRG port parity

SW38

PRG port response delay

NOTE

(1) These devices are set by the T1-16S operating system. These devices
are read only for user.
(2) Devices marked as (down) are set in the ERROR mode. Therefore
these devices cannot be used in the user program.

SW25
SW26
SW27
SW28

Present count values of the high speed counters are
stored
Control flags for the high speed counters
Reserved
Used to select the special output functions
Control flags for the pulse/PWM output
Output frequency setting for the pulse/PWM output
Pulse duty setting for the PWM output
Input value of the analog setting adjuster V0
Input value of the analog setting adjuster V1
Reserved
Reserved
TOSLINE-F10 transmission data (send to master)
TOSLINE-F10 transmission data (receive from master)
Used to set the programmer port station address
(1 to 32)
Used to set the programmer port parity (0=none,
1=odd)
Used to set the programmer port response delay time
(0 to 30: 0 to 300ms)

Basic Hardware and Function

83

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information
Device/
register
S390
S391
S392
S393
S394
S395
S396
S397
S398
S399
S39A
S39B
S39C
S39D
S39E
S39F
S400
S401

Name
Timer interrupt execution
status
I/O interrupt #1 execution
status
I/O interrupt #2 execution
status
I/O interrupt #3 execution
status
I/O interrupt #4 execution
status
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
HOLD device

S402
S403
S404
S405
S406
S407
S408
S409
S40A
S40B
S40C
S40D
S40E
S40F

84

T1-16S User’s Manual

−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−

Function
ON during execution
ON during execution
ON during execution
ON during execution
ON during execution
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
ON during HOLD mode (setting by user program is also
available)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information
Device/
register
SW41
SW42
SW43
SW44
SW45
SW46
SW47
SW48
SW49
SW50
SW51
SW52
SW53
SW54

SW55
SW56

SW57
SW58
SW59
SW60
SW61
SW62
SW63
NOTE

Name

Function

Sub-program #1 execution
status
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Basic unit I/O LED display
mode

Bit 0 (S410) is ON during the sub-program #1 is
executed
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Used to display the selected I/O module status
(0 = Basic unit, 1 to 8 = I/O module slot 0 to 7,
9 and 10 = TOSLINE-F10)
Number of EEPROM write Used to set the number of data registers to be saved in
data
the EEPROM (0 to 2048, initial value is 2048)
RS-485 port operation
Used to set the RS-485 port operation mode
mode
(0 = Computer link, 1 = Data link, 2 = Free ASCII,
3 = Inverter connection)
RS-485 port response
Used to set the RS-485 port response delay time
delay
(0 to 30: 0 to 300ms)
RS-485 port Free ASCII
Used for the RS-485 port Free ASCII function
flags
Reserved
−
Reserved
−
Reserved
−
Reserved
−
Reserved
−

(1) For details of SW54, refer to section 1.5.1.
(2) For details of SW55, refer to section 5.2.
(3) For details of SW56 through SW58, refer to the Communication
function manual.

Basic Hardware and Function

85

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information
6.2 Index modification
When registers are used as operands of instructions, the method of directly
designating the register address as shown in Example 1) below is called ‘direct
addressing’.
As opposed to this, the method of indirectly designating the register by combination
with the contents of the index register (I, J, or K) as shown in Example 2) below is
called ‘indirect addressing’. In particular, in this case, since the address is modified
using an index register, this is called ‘index modification’.
Example 1)
[ RW10 MOV D1000 ]
Data transfer instruction
Transfer data of RW10 to D1000
Example 2)
I
J
[ RW10 MOV D0000 ]
Data transfer instruction (with index modification)
Transfer data of RW(10 + I) to D(0000 + J)
(If I = 3 and J = 200, the data of RW13 is transferred to D0200)

There are 3 types of index register, I, J and K. Each type processes 16-bit integers
(-32768 to 32767). There are no particular differences in function between these 3
types of index register.
There is no special instruction for substituting values in these index registers. These
are designated as destination of data transfer instructions, etc.
[ 00064 MOV I ]
(substitutes 64 in index register I)
[ D0035 MOV J ]
(substitutes the data of D0035 in index register J)
[ RW20 + 00030 → K ] (substitutes the result of addition in index register K)

NOTE

(1) The index modification is available for RW, T, C and D registers.
(2) If index registers are used as a double-length register, only the
combinations J×I and K×J are allowed.

86

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information
The followings are examples of index modifications.

I
RW10

When I = 0, it designates RW10.
When I = 1, it designates RW11.
When I = -1, it designates RW09.
When I = 10, it designates RW20.
When I = -10, it designates RW00.

J
D0201⋅D0200

When J = 0, it designates D0201⋅D0200.
When J = 1, it designates D0202⋅D0201.
When J = 2, it designates D0203⋅D0202.
When J = -1, it designates D0200⋅D0199.
When J = -2, it designates D0199⋅D0198.

! CAUTION

Be careful that the registers do not exceed the address range by the index
modification. The address range is not checked by the T1-16S.

NOTE

Substitutions of values into index registers and index modifications can be
used any times in a program. Normally, the program will be easier to see if
a value substitution into an index register is positioned immediately before
the index modification.

Basic Hardware and Function

87

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information
6.3 Real-time clock/calendar (Enhanced model only)
The T1-16S enhanced model is equipped with the real-time clock/calendar for year,
month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, and second.
These data are stored in the special registers SW07 to SW13 by 2-digit BCD format
as follows.
Register
SW07
SW08
SW09
SW10
SW11
SW12
SW13

Function
Year
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
Second
Week

Data
1999 = H0099, 2000 = H0000, 2001 = H0001, 2002 = H0002 ...
Jan. = H0001, Feb. = H0002, Mar. = H0003, ... Dec. = H0012
1st = H0001, 2nd = H0002, 3rd = H0003, ... 31st = H0031
H0000, H0001, H0002, ... H0022, H0023
H0000, H0001, H0002, ... H0058, H0059
H0000, H0001, H0002, ... H0058, H0059
Sun. = H0000, Mon. = H0001, Tue. = H0002, ... Sat. = H0006

Program example:
In the following circuit, output Y030 turns ON for 1 minute at every Sunday 6 pm.
(H0018)

Clock/calendar back up:
The clock/calendar continues updating even while the power to the T1-16S is off by
built-in capacitor and by the optional battery (CR2032) if used. Its buck-up period is as
follows.
Environment
temperature
Under 30 °C (86 °F)
Over 30 °C (86 °F)

Expected value
Capacitor
Battery
2 hours
2 year
1 hours
1 year

Guarantee value
Capacitor
Battery
1 hours
1 year
30 minutes
6 months

As shown in the table, it is recommended to use the optional battery when the realtime clock/calendar function is used.
In the T1-16S, the validity of the clock/calendar is checked. If the data is not valid by
excess power off period, special relay S00A is set to ON. Therefore, when the
clock/calendar is used, it is recommended to check the status of S00A in the user
program.
Setting the clock/calendar:
To set the clock/calendar data, the following 2 ways are available. In both cases, the
week data is automatically calculated.
(1) Setting the clock/calendar data on the system information screen of the
programming tool.
(2) Using the Calendar Set instruction (CLND) in the user program.

88

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information
6.4 I/O allocation
The external input signals are allocated to the external input devices/registers (X/XW).
The external output signals are allocated to the external output devices/registers
(Y/YW).
The register numbers of the external input and output registers are consecutive. Thus
one register number can be assigned for either input or output.
As for the T1-16S basic unit, I/O allocation is fixed as follows.

T1-16S

X000 --- X007

Inputs: 8 points (X000 - X007)
Outputs: 8 points (Y020 - Y027)

Y020---- Y027

Any operations for the I/O allocation are not required if only the T1 -16S basic unit is
used.
However, if the I/O modules are used with the T1-16S, the I/O allocation operation is
necessary. Refer to the separate manual "T1-16S User's Manual - I/O Modules -".

Basic Hardware and Function

89

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information
Internally, the T1-16S has information called ‘I/O allocation table’ in its memory. This
I/O allocation table shows the correspondence between I/O hardware and software,
i.e. register/device.
The contents of the I/O allocation table are as follows.
Unit

0

1

Slot
PU
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

I/O type
X+Y 4W

PU slot must be blank
Slot 0 is for basic unit (XW00, XW01, YW02
and YW03 are assigned internally)
Slots 1 to 7 of unit 0 are not used
(must be blank)

These slots are for I/O modules

The T1-16S operating system automatically sets the I/O type ‘X+Y 4W’ on the slot 0 at
unit 0 position when the memory clear is executed for the T1-16S.
When the T1-16S program is developed in off-line, the above I/O allocation table
should be set before programming. For this operation (called manual I/O allocation),
refer to the programming tool manual.

NOTE

(1) Unit base address setting function is not supported by the T1-16S.
Do not use this function with the T1-16S. It will causes malfunction.
(2) When the TOSLINE-F10 station module FR112M is used, allocate it at
the end of the I/O modules.

90

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information
6.5 T1-16S memory mode setting
The program capacity of the T1-16S is 8 k steps. However, user can set the T1-16S’s
program capacity to 4 k steps. It is called the T1-16S’s memory mode.
That is, the T1-16S has two memory modes, 8 k mode and 4 k mode.
In the 4 k mode, on-line program changes become available, although the program
capacity is limited to 4 k steps. Refer to section 6.9 for the on-line debug support
functions.
To set the T1-16S’s memory mode, write 4 k or 8 k on the Program Size Setting of the
System Parameters using the programming tool. Then execute the EEPROM write
command.

Basic Hardware and Function

91

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information
6.6 User program configuration
A group of instructions for achieving the PLC-based control system is called ‘user
program’. The T1-16S has 8 k steps capacity for storing the user program.
A ‘step’ is the minimum unit, which composes an instruction. Number of steps required
for one instruction is depending on the type of instruction. Refer to section 7.1.
The figure below shows the T1-16S’s memory configuration.

RAM
System information

4 k or 8 k steps

User program

Back-up area
by EEPROM

Data registers
mentioned in
section 5.2

Other registers/
devices

NOTE

For conditions of transfer between RAM and EEPROM, see section 5.2.

92

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information
System information
System information is the area which stores execution control parameters. The
following contents are included in the system information.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)

Machine parameters (hardware type, memory type)
User program information (program ID, system comments, number of steps used)
Passwords
Retentive register area information
T1S program memory mode, 4 k steps or 8 k steps
Execution control parameters (scan mode, timer interrupt interval)
Station number setting for programmer port (T1), or RS-485 port communication
parameters (Enhanced model)
(8) I/O allocation table
(9) Input force table
The system information is stored in the built-in EEPROM. Therefore, when this
information is modified, the EEPROM write operation is necessary. Otherwise, these
are over-written by original EEPROM contents at the next initial load timing.

User program
The T1-16S has a capacity of 8 k steps of the user program.
The user program is stored by each program types as shown in the following diagram,
and is managed by units called blocks in each program types.
User program configuration
(Program types)

Program type internal configuration
(Blocks)

Main program

Block 1

Sub-program #1

Block 2

Timer interrupt
I/O interrupt #1
I/O interrupt #2
I/O interrupt #3
I/O interrupt #4

Block 10
Block N
(N = max. 256)
Block 1

Subroutine

Basic Hardware and Function

93

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information
In the user program, the main program is the core. The scan operation explained in
section 5.3 is for the main program. The operation of other program types are
explained in the following sections.
The following 8 program types are supported by the T1-16S.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)

Main program
Sub-program #1
Timer interrupt program
I/O interrupt program #1
I/O interrupt program #2
I/O interrupt program #3
I/O interrupt program #4
Subroutine

The blocks are just separators of the program, and have no effect on the program
execution. However, by dividing the user program into some blocks, the program
becomes easy to understand. The block numbers need not be consecutive.
In each program type and block, there is no limit of program capacity. The only limit is
the total capacity.

6.6.1

Main program
The main program is the core of the user program. It is executed once in each scan.
1 scan time

Mode

I/O

Timer

Main program

Mode

I/O

Timer

Main program

Time

In the above figure,
Mode means the mode control operation
I/O means the I/O update processing
Timer means the timer up date processing
Main program means the main program execution
the self-diagnostic check and peripheral support are omitted in this figure.
The end of the main program is recognized by the END instruction.
Although instructions may be present after the END instruction, these portions will not
be executed.

94

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information
6.6.2

Sub-program #1
If the sub-program #1 is programmed, it is executed once at the beginning of the first
scan (before main program execution).
Therefore, the sub-program #1 can be used to set the initial value into the registers.
The sub-program #1 is called the initial program.
The figure below shows the first scan operation.

RUN mode
transition

2nd scan

1st scan
I/O Timer Sub#1

Main program

Mode I/O Timer

Main program

Time

The end of the sub-program #1 is recognized by the END instruction.

6.6.3

Timer interrupt program
The timer interrupt is the highest priority task. It is executed cyclically with a user
specified interval, with suspending other operation.
The interrupt interval is set in the system information. (5 to 1000 ms, 5 ms units)
1 scan

1 scan

1 scan

1 scan

Scan

Timer interrupt

Timer interrupt
interval

Timer interrupt
interval

Time

The end of the timer interrupt is recognized by the IRET instruction.

Basic Hardware and Function

95

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information
6.6.4

I/O interrupt programs
The I/O interrupt program is also the highest priority task. It is executed immediately
when the interrupt factor is generated, with suspending other operation.
The following 4 types I/O interrupt programs are supported in the T1/T1S.
(1) I/O interrupt #1
The I/O interrupt #1 is used with the high speed counter function. When the count
value reaches the preset value, etc., the I/O interrupt #1 is activated immediately
with suspending other operation. The end of the I/O interrupt #1 is recognized by
the IRET instruction. For detailed information, refer to section 8.3.
(2) I/O interrupt #2
The I/O interrupt #2 is also used with the high speed counter function. Refer to
section 8.3 for details.
(3) I/O interrupt #3
The I/O interrupt #3 is used with the interrupt input function. When the state of the
interrupt input is changed from OFF to ON (or ON to OFF), the I/O interrupt #3 is
activated immediately with suspending other operation. The end of the I/O
interrupt #3 is also recognized by the IRET instruction. For detailed information,
refer to section 8.4.
(4) I/O interrupt #4
The I/O interrupt #4 is also used with the interrupt input function. Refer to section
8.4 for details.

If an interrupt factor is generated while other interrupt program is executing (including
the timer interrupt), the interrupt factor is held. Then it will be activated after finishing
the other interrupt program execution.
If two or more interrupt factors are generated at the same time, the priority is as
follows.
Timer > I/O #1 > I/O #2 > I/O #3 > I/O #4

96

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information
6.6.5

Subroutines
In the program type ‘Subroutine’, The following number of subroutines can be
programmed.
The T1-16S supports up to 256 subroutines.
The subroutine is not a independent program. It is called from other program types
(main program, sub-program, interrupt program) and from other subroutines.
One subroutine is started with the SUBR instruction, and ended by the RET
instruction.
It is necessary to assign a subroutine number to the SUBR instruction. The available
subroutine numbers are 0 to 255.
[ SUBR (000) ]
Subroutine number
The RET instruction has no subroutine number.
The instruction that calls a registered subroutine is the CALL instruction. The CALL
instruction has the subroutine number to be called.
[ CALL N.000 ]
Subroutine number
Main program

Execution
flow

Subroutine
[ SUBR (000) ]

[ CALL N.000 ]
 [ RET ]

NOTE

(1) Multiple subroutines can be programmed in a block. However, one
subroutine in one block is recommended.
(2) From the inside of a subroutine, other subroutines can be called
(nesting). Its allowable level is up to 3 levels.

Basic Hardware and Function

97

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information
6.7 Programming language
The programming language of the T1-16S is ‘ladder diagram’.
Ladder diagram is a language, which composes program using relay symbols as a
base in an image similar to a hard-wired relay sequence. In the T1/T1S, in order to
achieve an efficient data-processing program, ladder diagram which are combinations
of relay symbols and function blocks are used.
The ladder diagram program is constructed by units called ‘rung’. A rung is defined as
one network which is connected each other.
Rung number

Rung

1

2

3

The rung numbers are a series of numbers (decimal number) starting from 1, and
cannot be skipped. There is no limit to the number of rungs.
The size of any one rung is limited to 11 lines × 12 columns.
A example of a ladder diagram program is shown below.

When X005 is ON or the data of D0100 is greater than 200, Y027 comes ON.
Y027 stays ON even if X005 is OFF and the data of D0100 is 200 or less.
Y027 will come OFF when X006 comes ON.

98

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information
6.8 Program execution sequence
The instructions execution sequence is shown below.
(1) They are executed in the sequence from block 1 through the final block, which
contains the END instruction (or IRET in an interrupt program).
(2) They are executed in the sequence from rung 1 through the final rung in a block
(or the END instruction).
(3) They are executed according to the following rules in any one rung.

? When there is no vertical

connection, they are
executed from left to right.

@ When there is an OR

1

2

3

1

2

4

connection, the OR logic
portion is executed first.

4

6

7

3
5

A When there is a branch, they

1

2

are executed in the order from
the upper line to the lower line.

B A combination of @ and A

1

3

3

4

5

6

4

5

6

8

above.

2
7

The instructions execution sequence in which function instructions are included also
follows the above rules. However, for program execution control instructions, such as
jumps (JCS), loops (FOR-NEXT), subroutines (CALL-SUBR-RET), it will depend the
specifications of each instruction.

Basic Hardware and Function

99

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information
6.9 On-line debug support functions
The following on-line (during RUN) functions are supported in the T1-16S for effective
program debugging.
On-line function
Force function
Sampling trace function
Changing timer /counter
preset value
Changing constant operand of
function instruction
Changing device directly
Program changing in edit
mode
EEPROM write command

4 k mode
Yes
Yes
Yes

8 k mode
Yes
Yes
Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
No

Yes

Yes

NOTE

Refer to section 6.5 for 4 k/8 k mode.

Force function
Two types of force functions are available, input force and coil force.
The input force is used to disable the external input signals. When an external input
device is designated as forced input, the ON/OFF state of the device can be changed
manually by using the data setting function of the programming tool, regardless of the
corresponding external signal state. The input force designation is available for the
external input devices (X).
The coil force is used to disable the coil instruction. When a coil instruction on the
program is designated as forced coil, the ON/OFF state of the coil device can be
changed manually by using the data setting function of the programming tool,
regardless of the coil circuit execution status.
On the programming tool, the forced input and forced coil are expressed as follows.
Forced input

Forced coil

NOTE

100

X005

x005

Normal

Forced

Y023

Y023

Normal

Forced

If EEPROM write operation is executed with remaining the force
designation, the force designation is also saved into the built-in EEPROM.
Because the force function is debugging function, release all force
designation before executing the EEPROM write operation. The force batch
release command is available when the T1-16S is in HALT mode.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information
Sampling trace function
The sampling trace function collects the status of specified devices or register at every
specified sampling timing. The collected data can be displayed on the programmer
(T-PDS) screen in the format of timing chart (for devices) or trend graph (for register).
The minimum sampling timing is the T1-16S’s scan cycle.
This function is useful for program debugging and troubleshooting.

Sampling target
Sampling capacity

T1-16S
Devices (up to 8) and
Registers (up to 3)
256 times

The collected data is stored in the T1-16S internal buffer.
The buffer works as a ring buffer, and latest collected data can be displayed.
The sampling start/stop condition (arm condition) and the collection timing (trigger
condition) can be specified by status changing of devices.
For detailed key operations for arm/trigger conditions setting on the T-PDS, refer to
the manual for T-PDS.
T-PDS screen example of device timing chart

NOTE

(1) On the T-PDS, select ‘3 registers + 8 devices’ as the sampling type.
(2) As the arm and trigger conditions, register values cannot be used.
(3) The After times setting is not effective for the T1-16S.

Basic Hardware and Function

101

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information
Timer/counter preset value (constant data) changing
The preset value (constant data) of timer or counter instruction can be changed in online (during RUN) by using the programming tool.

Function instruction constant operand changing
The constant operand of function instruction can be changed in on-line (during RUN)
by using the programming tool.

Device changing
The device of contact or coil instruction can be changed in on-line (during RUN) by
using the programming tool.

On-line program changing
When the T1S’s memory mode is 4 k mode, the program can be changed using
normal edit mode. (rung by rung)
In the on-line program changing, it is not allowed to change the number or order of the
following instructions.
END, MCS, MCR, JCS, JCR, FOR, NEXT, CALL, SUBR, RET, IRET
NOTE

The above on-line functions are performed on the RAM memory. Therefore,
when program has been changed, execute the EEPROM write operation
before turning off power. Otherwise, program stored in the EEPROM will be
overwritten.

On-line EEPROM write
The EEPROM write is possible in on-line (during RUN) as well as in HALT mode.
In the on-line EEPROM write, user data is not written into the EEPROM.
During this operation, the T1-16S’s scan time becomes longer. However, as it has the
time limit per scan, the T1-16S’s control operation is not stopped.

102

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information
6.10 Password protection
The T1-16S has the password function to protect the user program and data from
unauthorized operations.
There are four levels of protection. Accordingly, three levels of passwords can be
registered to control the protection levels.
These passwords are stored in the built-in EEPROM. Therefore, if you entered,
changed or cleared the passwords, the EEPROM write operation is necessary.
The outline of the protection levels are shown below. For details, refer to the manual
for the programming tool.

Protection level 4 (disabled functions)
• Writing register/device data
• Writing system information
• I/O allocation

Protection level 3 (disabled functions)
• Reading program
• Program write into EEPROM

Strict

Protection level 2 (disabled functions)
• Clear memory
• Writing/loading program
• T1/T1S operation mode changes (by programming tool)
• Setting/changing passwords

Protection level 1 (disabled functions)
• None (all functions are available)

When the level 1, 2 and 3 passwords are registered, the T1-16S will be started as
protection level 4. In this state, for example, entering the level 2 password changes
the protection level to 2.
NOTE

When you use the password function, do not forget the level 1 password.
Otherwise, you cannot change/release the registered passwords.

Basic Hardware and Function

103

6F3B0253

104

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Section 7
Instructions

7.1
7.2

List of instructions, 106
Instruction specifications, 116

Basic Hardware and Function

105

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
7.1 List of instructions
The T1-16S has 21 types of basic ladder instructions and 97 types of function
instructions as listed below. The specifications of each instruction will be described in
detail later.
The tables listing these instructions are provided as a quick reference. (Note: In the
following table, italic character means operand, i.e. register, device or constant value.)
Basic ladder instructions
FUN
No.

Name

Expression

− NO contact

A

− NC contact

A

− Transitional

contact (rising)

− Transitional

contact (falling)

− Coil

A

− Forced coil

A

− Inverter
− Invert coil

I
A
I
A
P

− Positive pulse
contact

− Negative pulse

A
N

− Positive pulse coil

A
P

− Negative pulse coil

A
N

contact

− ON delay timer

− OFF delay timer

− Single shot timer

106

T1-16S User’s Manual

−[ A TON B ]−

−[ A TOF B ]−

−[ A SS B ]−

Function
NO (normally open) contact of
device A.
NC (normally closed) contact
of device A.
Turns ON output for 1 scan
when input changes from OFF
to ON.
Turns ON output for 1 scan
when input changes from ON
to OFF.
Relay coil of device A.
Forced coil of device A. State
of device A is retained
regardless of the input state.
Inverts the input state.
Stores the inverse state of
input into device A.
Turns ON output for 1 scan
when input is ON and device A
changes from OFF to ON.
Turns ON output for 1 scan
when input is ON and device A
changes from ON to OFF.
Turns ON device A for 1 scan
when input changes from OFF
to ON.
Turns ON device A for 1 scan
when input changes from ON
to OFF.
Turns ON output when the
time specified by A has
elapsed after the input came
ON. B is a timer register.
Turns OFF output when the
time specified by A has
elapsed after the input came
OFF. B is a timer register.
Turns ON output for the time
specified by A when the input
comes ON. B is a timer
register.

Steps

Speed
(µs)

Page

1

1.4 - 3.3 117

1

1.4 - 3.3 118

1

3.0

119

1

3.0

120

1

2.3

121

1

2.3

122

1
1

1.4 - 3.3 123
2.3

124

1

125

1

126

1

127

1

128

2

12.6

129

2

12.8

130

2

13.0

131

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
Basic ladder instructions (continued)
FUN
No.

Name

Expression

− Counter

C
E

CNT
A B

Q

− Master control set −−[ MCS ]−
− Master control reset −−[ MCR ]−
− Jump control set
− Jump control reset

−−[ JCS ]−
−−[ JCR ]−

− End

−−[ END ]−

Steps

Speed
(µs)

Page

2

22.6

132

1

1

3.75
(in a
pair)
2.75
(in a
pair)

Indicates end of main program
or sub-program.

1

1.4

Function

Steps

Transfers data of A to B.
Transfers double-word data
of A+1⋅A to B+1⋅B.
Transfers bit-inverted data of
A to B.
Exchanges data of A with B.
Transfers data of A to n
registers starting with B.
Transfers data of n registers
starting with A to n registers
starting with B.
Transfers bit-inverted data of
n registers starting with A to
n registers starting with B.
Transfers data from the
register specified by B in the
table, size n starting with A,
to C.
Transfers data from A to the
register specified by B in the
table, size n starting with C.

3

Speed
(µs)
4.2

3

7.2

137

3

4.6

138

3

6.5

139

Function
Counts the number of cycles
the count input (C) comes ON
while the enable input (E) is
ON, and turns ON output (Q)
when the count reaches to the
value specified by A. B is a
counter register.
Turns OFF power rail between
MCS and MCR when MCS
input is OFF.
Jumps from JCS to JCR when
JCS input is ON.

1
1

133

134
135

Data transfer instructions
FUN
Name
No.
018 Data transfer
019 Double-word
data transfer
020 Invert transfer

Expression
−[ A MOV B ]−
−[ A+1⋅A DMOV B+1⋅B ]−
−[ A NOT B ]−

022 Data exchange −[ A XCHG B ]−
024 Table initialize −[ A TINZ (n) B ]−
025 Table transfer

−[ A TMOV (n) B ]−

026 Table invert
transfer

−[ A TNOT (n) B ]−

090 Multiplexer

−[ A MPX (n) B → C ]−

091 Demultiplexer

−[ A DPX (n) B → C ]−

Page
136

3

140

3

141

3

142

5

70.6

176

5

71.5

177

Basic Hardware and Function

107

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
Arithmetic operations
FUN
Name
No.
027 Addition
028 Subtraction
029 Multiplication

030 Division

031 Double-word
addition
032 Double-word
subtraction
035 Addition with
carry

036 Subtraction
with carry

039 Unsigned
multiplication

040 Unsigned
division

041 Unsigned
double/single
division
043 Increment
044 Decrement

108

Expression
−[ A + B → C ]−

Function

Adds data of A and B, and
stores the result in C.
−[ A - B → C ]−
Subtracts data of B from A,
and stores the result in C.
−[ A ∗ B → C+1⋅C ]−
Multiplies data of A and B,
and stores the result in
double-length register C+1⋅C.
−[ A / B → C ]−
Divides data of A by B, and
stores the quotient in C and
the reminder in C+1.
−[ A+1⋅A D+ B+1⋅B → C+1⋅C ]− Adds data of A+1⋅A and
B+1⋅B, and stores the result
in C+1⋅C.
−[ A+1⋅A D- B+1⋅B → C+1⋅C ]− Subtracts data of B+1⋅B from
A+1⋅A, and stores the result
in C+1⋅C.
−[ A +C B → C ]−
Adds data of A, B and the
carry, and stores the result in
C. The carry flag changes
according to the result.
−[ A -C B → C ]−
Subtracts data of B and the
carry from A, and stores the
result in C. The carry flag
changes according to the
result.
−[ A U∗ B → C+1⋅C ]−
Multiplies data of A and B,
and stores the result in
double-length register C+1⋅C.
(Unsigned integer operation)
−[ A U/ B → C ]−
Divides data of A by B, and
stores the quotient in C and
the reminder in C+1.
(Unsigned integer operation)
−[ A+1⋅A DIV B → C ]−
Divides data of A+1⋅A by B,
and stores the quotient in C
and the reminder in C+1.
(Unsigned integer operation)
−[ +1 A ]−
Increments data of A by 1.
−[ -1 A ]−
Decrements data of A by 1.

T1-16S User’s Manual

Steps

Speed
(µs)

Page

4

6.5

143

4

6.5

144

4

8.8

145

4

9.7

146

4

11.6

147

4

11.7

148

4

9.7

149

4

9.7

150

4

151

4

152

4

15.3

153

2
2

4.6
4.6

154
155

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
Logical operations
FUN
Name
No.
048 AND

−[ A AND B → C ]−

050 OR

−[ A OR B → C ]−

052 Exclusive OR

−[ A EOR B → C ]−

064 Bit test

−[ A TEST B ]−

Expression

Function
Finds logical AND of A and B,
and stores it in C.
Finds logical OR of A and B,
and stores it in C.
Finds logical exclusive OR of A
and B, and stores it in C.
Turns ON output if logical AND
of A and B is not 0.

Steps

Speed
(µs)

Page

4

5.7

156

4

5.7

157

4

5.7

158

3

5.0

163

Steps

Speed
(µs)

Page

2

6.8

164

2

6.8

165

4

10.2

166

4

10.2

167

3

65.9 76.2

168

3

69.0 79.3

170

Shift operations
FUN
No.

Name

068 1 bit shift right
069 1 bit shift left
070 n bit shift right

071 n bit shift left

074 Shift register

075 Bi-directional
shift register

Expression
−[ SHR1 A ]−

−[ SHL1 A ]−

−[ A SHR n → B ]−

−[ A SHL n → B ]−

D
S
E

D
S
E
L

SR
(n)
A

DSR
(n)
A

Q

Q

Function
Shifts data of A 1 bit to the right
(LSB direction). The carry flag
changes according to the result.
Shifts data of A 1 bit to the left
(MSB direction). The carry flag
changes according to the result.
Shifts data of A n bits to the
right (LSB direction) and stores
the result in B. The carry flag
changes according to the result.
Shifts data of A n bits to the left
(MSB direction) and stores the
result in B. The carry flag
changes according to the result.
When shift input (S) comes ON,
shifts the data of specified shift
register 1 bit to the left, and
stores data input (D) state into
A. This operation is enabled
while enable input (E) is ON.
The carry flag changes
according to the result.
Shift register: n devices starting
with device A.
When shift input (S) comes ON,
shifts the data of specified shift
register 1 bit to the left or to the
right depending on direction
input (L). This operation is
enabled while enable input (E) is
ON. The carry flag changes
according to the result.
Shift register: n devices starting
with device A.
Direction: Left when L is ON,
right when L is OFF

Basic Hardware and Function

109

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
Rotate operations
FUN
Name
No.
078 1 bit rotate
right

079 1 bit rotate left

080 n bit rotate
right

081 n bit rotate left

Expression
−[ RTR1 A ]−

−[ RTL1 A ]−

−[ A RTR n → B ]−

−[ A RTL n → B ]−

Function
Rotates data of A 1 bit to the
right (LSB direction). The
carry flag changes according
to the result.
Rotates data of A 1 bit to the
left (MSB direction). The
carry flag changes according
to the result.
Rotates data of A n bits to
the right (LSB direction) and
stores the result in B. The
carry flag changes according
to the result.
Rotates data of A n bits to
the left (MSB direction) and
stores the result in B. The
carry flag changes according
to the result.

Steps

Speed
(µs)

Page

2

6.8

172

2

6.8

173

4

10.2

174

4

10.2

175

Compare instructions
FUN
Name
No.
096 Greater than
097 Greater than or
equal
098 Equal
099 Not equal
100 Less than
101 Less than or
equal
102 Double-word
greater than
103 Double-word
greater than or
equal
104 Double-word
equal
105 Double-word
not equal
106 Double-word
less than
107 Double-word
less than or
equal

110

Expression
−[ A > B ]−
−[ A >= B ]−
−[ A = B ]−
−[ A <> B ]−
−[ A < B ]−
−[ A <= B ]−
−[ A+1⋅A D> B+1⋅B ]−
−[ A+1⋅A D>= B+1⋅B ]−

−[ A+1⋅A D= B+1⋅B ]−
−[ A+1⋅A D<> B+1⋅B ]−
−[ A+1⋅A D< B+1⋅B ]−
−[ A+1⋅A D<= B+1⋅B ]−

T1-16S User’s Manual

Turns ON output if A > B.
Turns ON output if A ≥ B.

3

Speed
(µs)
6.1

3

5.3

179

A = B.
A ≠ B.
A < B.
A ≤ B.

3
3
3

5.0
5.0
6.1

180
181
182

3

5.3

183

3

6.1

184

3

5.3

185

3

5.0

186

3

5.0

187

3

6.1

188

3

5.3

189

Function

Turns ON output
Turns ON output
Turns ON output
Turns ON output
Turns ON output
if A+1⋅A > B+1⋅B.
Turns ON output
if A+1⋅A ≥ B+1⋅B.
Turns ON output
if A+1⋅A = B+1⋅B.
Turns ON output
if A+1⋅A ≠ B+1⋅B.
Turns ON output
if A+1⋅A < B+1⋅B.
Turns ON output
if A+1⋅A ≤ B+1⋅B.

if
if
if
if

Steps

Page
178

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
Compare instructions (continued)
FUN
Name
No.
108 Unsigned
greater than
109 Unsigned
greater than or
equal
110 Unsigned
equal
111 Unsigned
not equal
112 Unsigned
less than
113 Unsigned
less than or
equal

Expression
−[ A U> B ]−
−[ A U>= B ]−

−[ A U= B ]−
−[ A U<> B ]−
−[ A U< B ]−
−[ A U<= B ]−

Function
Turns ON output if A > B.
(Unsigned integer compare)
Turns ON output if A ≥ B.
(Unsigned integer compare)
Turns ON output if A = B.
(Unsigned integer compare)
Turns ON output if A ≠ B.
(Unsigned integer compare)
Turns ON output if A < B.
(Unsigned integer compare)
Turns ON output if A ≤ B.
(Unsigned integer compare)

Steps

Speed
(µs)

Page

3

190

3

191

3

192

3

193

3

194

3

195

Special data processing
FUN
Name
Expression
No.
114 Device/register −[ SET A ]−
set

115 Device/register −[ RST A ]−
reset

118 Set carry
119 Reset carry
120 Encode

121 Decode

−[ SETC ]−
−[ RSTC ]−
−[ A ENC (n) B ]−

−[ A DEC (n) B ]−

122 Bit count

−[ A BC B ]−

147 Flip-flop

S
R

149 Up-down
counter

U
C
E

F/F
A

U/D
A

Q

Q

Function
If A is a device:
Sets device A to ON.
If A is a register:
Stores HFFFF in register A.
If A is a device:
Resets device A to OFF.
If A is a register:
Stores 0 in register A.
Sets the carry flag to ON.
Resets the carry flag to OFF.
Finds the uppermost ON bit
position in the bit file of size 2n
bits starting with register A, and
stores it in B.
In the bit file of size 2n bits
starting with register B, sets ON
the bit position indicated by
lower n bits of A, and resets
OFF all other bits.
Counts the number of ON bits
of A and stores it in B.
Sets ON device A when set
input (S) is ON, and resets OFF
device A when reset input (R) is
ON.
(Reset takes priority)
While enable input (E) is ON,
counts up or down the number
of cycles the count input (C)
comes ON, depending on the
up/down select input (U).
Up when U is ON, down when U
is OFF.

Steps

Speed
(µs)

Page

2

4.2

196

2

4.2

197

1
1

4.2
4.2

198
199

4

57.0 141.4

200

4

69.5 99.1

201

3

202

2

26.7

215

2

30.1

216

Basic Hardware and Function

111

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
Program control instructions
FUN
Name
Expression
No.
128 Subroutine call −[ CALL N. n ]−
−−[ RET ]−
129 Subroutine
return
−[ FOR n ]−
132 FOR
133 NEXT

−[ NEXT ]−

137 Subroutine
entry
140 Enable
interrupt
141 Disable
interrupt
142 Interrupt return

−[ SUBR (n) ]−−
−[ EI ]−
−[ DI ]−
−−[ IRET ]−

−[ WDT n ]−
143 Watchdog
timer reset
144 Step sequence −[ STIZ (n) A ]−
initialize

145 Step sequence −[ STIN A ]−
input
146 Step sequence −[ STOT A ]−
output

Function

Steps

Calls the subroutine number n.
Indicates the end of a
subroutine.
When the input of FOR is ON,
executes the segment from
FOR to NEXT the number of
times specified by n.
Indicates the start of the
subroutine number n.
Enables execution of interrupt
program.
Disables execution of interrupt
program.
Indicates the end of an interrupt
program.
Extends the scan time over
detection time.
These
Resets OFF the n
devices stating with configure
a series
A, and sets ON A.
Turns ON output if of step
input is ON and A is sequence
ON.
When input is ON,
resets OFF the
devices of STIN on
the same rung, and
sets ON A.

2
1
2
1
2
1

Speed
(µs)
21.0
(in a
pair)
22.0
(in a
pair)

Page
203
204
205
206

included
207
in CALL
208

1

27.6
(in a
pair)

1

1.4

210

2

16.1

211

3

59.9 65.0

212

2

27.0

213

2

27.0 119.0

214

Steps

Speed
(µs)

Page

209

RAS
FUN
Name
No.
154 Set calendar
155 Calendar
operation

112

Expression
−[ A CLND ]−
−[ A CLDS B ]−

T1-16S User’s Manual

Function
Sets 6 registers data starting
with A into clock/calendar.
Calculates difference between
present date & time and past
date & time stored in 6 registers
starting with A, and stores the
result in 6 registers starting with
B.

2

217

3

218

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
Functions
FUN
Name
No.
056 Moving
average
061 Digital filter

156 Pre-derivative
real PID

160 Upper limit

161 Lower limit

162 Maximum
value

Expression

Steps

Speed
(µs)

Page

−[ A MAVE (n) B → C ]− Calculates the average value

−[ A DFL B → C ]−

−[ A PID3 B → C ]−

−[ A UL B → C ]−

−[ A LL B → C ]−

−[ A MAX (n) B ]−

163 Minimum value −[ A MIN (n) B ]−

164 Average value −[ A AVE (n) B ]−

165 Function
generator

Function

−[ A FG (n) B → C ]−

of latest n scan values of A,
and stores the result in C.
Filters the value of A by filter
constant specified by B, and
stores the result in C.
Performs PID control. (prederivative real PID algorithm)
Process value (PV): A
Set value (SV): A+1
PID parameters: B and after
Manipulation value (MV): C
Upper limits the value of A
by B, and stores the result in
C.
Lower limits the value of A
by B, and stores the result in
C.
Finds the maximum value of
n registers data starting with
A, and stores the value in C
and the pointer in C+1.
Finds the minimum value of
n registers data starting with
A, and stores the value in C
and the pointer in C+1.
Calculates the average value
of n registers data starting
with A, and stores the result
in C.
Finds f(x) for given x=A, and
stores it in C. The function
f(x) is defined by parameters
stored in a table 2×n
registers starting with B.

5

159

4

160

4

85.0 428.0

219

4

224

4

225

4

226

4

227

4

228

5

77.7 142.1

229

Basic Hardware and Function

113

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
Conversion instructions
FUN
Name
No.
062 Hex to ASCII
conversion

063 ASCII to Hex
conversion

Expression
−[ A HTOA (n) B ]−

−[ A ATOH (n) B ]−

180 Absolute value −[ A ABS B ]−

114

182 2’s
complement

−[ A NEG B ]−

183 Double-word
2’s
complement
185 7-segment
decode

−[ A+1⋅A DNEG B+1⋅B ]−

186 ASCII
conversion

−[ A ASC B ]−

−[ A 7SEG B ]−

188 Binary
conversion

−[ A BIN B ]−

190 BCD
conversion

−[ A BCD B ]−

T1-16S User’s Manual

Function
Converts the hexadecimal
data of n words stating with
A into ASCII characters, and
stores them in nx2 registers
starting with B.
Converts the ASCII
characters stored in n
registers stating with A into
hexadecimal data, and stores
them in n/2 registers starting
with B.
Stores the absolute value of
A in B.
Stores the 2’s complement
value of A in B.
Stores the 2’s complement
value of A+1⋅A in B+1⋅B.

Steps

Speed
(µs)

Page

4

161

4

162

3

5.0

231

3

4.6

232

3

4.6

233

43.9

234

29.8 49.6

236

65.5

237

55.6

238

Converts lower 4 bits of A
into 7-segment code, and
3
stores it in B.
Converts the alphanumerics
(max. 16 characters) of A
into ASCII codes, and stores 3 - 10
them in registers starting
with B.
Converts the BCD data in A
into binary data, and stores it
3
in B.
Converts the binary data in A
into BCD data, and stores it
3
in B.

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
Special I/O instructions
FUN
Name
No.
235 Direct I/O

Expression
−[ I/O (n) A ]−

236 Expanded data −[ A XFER B → C ]−
transfer

Function
Performs the immediate
block I/O transfer of n
registers starting with A.
Writes data into the built-in
EEPROM, or reads data
from the EEPROM. The
transfer source and
destination are indirectly
designated by A and C. The
transfer register size is
designated by B.

Steps

Speed
Available Page
(µs)

3

20.7 +
21.3 × n

√ *1

257

4

54.0
1w
read
7130
16w
write

√

259

*1: Direct I/O instruction is effective only for the basic unit inputs/outputs.
*2: The expanded data transfer (XFER) instruction supports some special functions. It
also supports the communication function. The execution speed shown in the
above table is for the EEPROM read/write function. When the Inverter connection
mode is selected, the execution speed of this instruction is typically 150 µs (max.
500 µs).
NOTE

The index modification is available for some instructions. The values in the
execution speed column show the execution time without index
modification.
If index modification is used, approx. 20 µs is added per one indexed
operand.

Basic Hardware and Function

115

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
7.2 Instruction specifications
The following pages in this section describe the detailed specifications of each
instruction. On each page, the following items are explained.

Expression
Shows the operands required for the instruction as italic characters.

Function
Explains the functions of the instruction with referring the operands shown on the
Expression box.

Execution condition
Shows the execution condition of the instruction and the instruction output status.

Operand
Shows available register, device or constant value for each operand. For constant
operand, available value range is described. If the constant column is just marked (√),
it means normal value range (-32768 to 32767 in 16-bit integer or -2147483648 to
2147483647 in 32-bit integer) is available.
Whether index modification for a register operand is usable or not is also shown for
each operand.

Example
Explains the operation of the instruction by using a typical example.

Note
Explains supplementary information, limitations, etc. for the instruction.

116

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
NO contact
Expression
A
Input

Output

Function
NO (normally open) contact of device A.
When the input is ON and the device A is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
Regardless of the state of device A
When device A is OFF
When device A is ON

Output
OFF
OFF
ON

Operand
Name
A Device

X
√

Y
√

Device
R S T.
√ √ √

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√

Constant Index
I

J

K

Example

Coil Y022 comes ON when the devices X000 and R001 are both ON.

X000
R001
Y022

Basic Hardware and Function

117

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
NC contact
Expression
A
Input

Output

Function
NC (normally closed) contact of device A.
When the input is ON and the device A is OFF, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
Regardless of the state of device A
When device A is OFF
When device A is ON

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

Operand
Name
A Device

X
√

Y
√

Device
R S T.
√ √ √

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√

Constant Index
I

Example

Coil Y022 comes ON when the devices X000 and R001 are both OFF.

X000
R001
Y022

118

T1-16S User’s Manual

J

K

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
Transitional contact (Rising edge)
Expression
Input

Output

Function
When the input at last scan is OFF and the input at this scan is ON, the output is turned ON.
This instruction is used to detect the input changing from OFF to ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
Regardless of the input state at last scan
When the input state at last scan is OFF
When the input state at last scan is ON

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

Operand
No operand is required.

Example

Coil Y022 comes ON for only 1 scan when the device X000 comes ON.

X000
Y022

1 scan time

1 scan time

Note
• In case of T1, the maximum usable number in a program is 512. (
• In case of T1S, the maximum usable number in a program is 2048.
(
total)
P
N
(P)
(N)

and

total)

Basic Hardware and Function

119

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
Transitional contact (Falling edge)
Expression
Input

Output

Function
When the input at last scan is ON and the input at this scan is OFF, the output is turned ON.
This instruction is used to detect the input changing from ON to OFF.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
When the input state at last scan is OFF
When the input state at last scan is ON
Regardless of the input state at last scan

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

Operand
No operand is required.

Example

Coil Y022 comes ON for only 1 scan when the device X000 comes OFF.

X000
Y022

1 scan time

1 scan time

Note
• In case of T1, the maximum usable number in a program is 512. (
• In case of T1S, the maximum usable number in a program is 2048.
(
total)
P
N
(P)
(N)

120

T1-16S User’s Manual

and

total)

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
Coil

( )
Expression
Input

A
( )

Function
Relay coil of device A.
When the input is ON, the device A is set to ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
Sets device A to OFF
Sets device A to ON

Output
−
−

Operand
Name
X
A Device

Y
√

Device
R S T.
√ √

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D

Constant Index
I

J

K

Example

Coil Y025 comes ON when the devices X000 is ON.

X000
Y025

Basic Hardware and Function

121

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
Forced coil
Expression
A
Input

Function
Regardless of the input sate the state of device A is retained.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
−
−

No operation
No operation

Operand
Name
X
A Device

Y
√

Device
R S T.
√ √

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D

Constant Index
I

J

K

Example

Device Y025 retains the preceding state regardless of the devices X000 state.

X000
Y025

Set force

Reset force

Set force

Reset force

Note
• The forced coil is a debugging function. The state of a forced coil device can be set ON or OFF
by the programming tool.

122

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
I

Inverter

Expression
Input

I

Output

Function
When the input is OFF, the output is turned ON, and when the input is ON, the output is turned
OFF.
This instruction inverts the link state.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
Inverts the input state
Inverts the input state

Output
ON
OFF

Operand
No operand is required.

Example

Y022 comes ON when X000 is OFF, and Y022 comes OFF when X000 is ON.

X000
Y022

Basic Hardware and Function

123

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
Invert coil

(I)
Expression
Input

A
(I)

Function
When the input is OFF, the device A is set to ON, and when the input is ON, the device A is set to
OFF. This instruction inverts the input state and store it in the device A.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
Sets device A to ON
Sets device A to OFF

Output
−
−

Operand
Name
X
A Device

Y
√

Device
R S T.
√ √

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D

Constant Index
I

J

K

Example

Y025 comes ON when X000 is OFF, and Y025 comes OFF when X000 is ON.

X000
Y025

124

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
Positive pulse contact

P

Expression
A
Input

P

Output

Function
When the input is ON and the device A is changed from OFF to ON (OFF at last scan and ON at
this scan), the output is turned ON.
This instruction is used to detect the device changing from OFF to ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
Regardless of the state of device A
State of device A is OFF
State of device A is ON
A is OFF at last scan
A is ON at last scan

Output
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF

Operand
Name
A Device

X
√

Y
√

Device
R S T.
√ √ √

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√

Constant Index
I

J

K

Example

R100 comes ON for only 1 scan when X000 is ON and X003 changes to ON.

X000
X003
R100

1 scan time

1 scan time

Note
• The maximum usable number in a program is 2048.
(
total)
P
N
(P)
(N)

Basic Hardware and Function

125

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
Negative pulse contact

N

Expression
A
Input

N

Output

Function
When the input is ON and the device A is changed from ON to OFF (ON at last scan and OFF at
this scan), the output is turned ON.
This instruction is used to detect the device changing from ON to OFF.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
Regardless of the state of device A
State of device A is OFF A is OFF at last scan
A is ON at last scan
State of device A is ON

Output
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF

Operand
Name
A Device

X
√

Y
√

Device
R S T.
√ √ √

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√

Constant Index
I

J

K

Example

R100 comes ON for only 1 scan when X000 is ON and X003 changes to OFF.

X000
X003
R100

1 scan time

1 scan time

Note
• The maximum usable number in a program is 2048.
(
total)
P
N
(P)
(N)

126

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
Positive pulse coil

(P)
Expression
Input

A
(P)

Function
When the input is changed form OFF to ON, the device A is set to ON for 1 scan time.
This instruction is used to detect the input changing from OFF to ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
Sets device A to OFF
When the input at last scan is OFF, sets A to ON
When the input at last scan is ON, sets A to OFF

Output
−
−
−

Operand
Name
X
A Device

Y
√

Device
R S T.
√ √

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D

Constant Index
I

J

K

Example

R101 comes ON for only 1 scan when X000 is changed from OFF to ON.

X000
R100

1 scan time

1 scan time

Note
• The maximum usable number in a program is 2048.
(
total)
P
N
(P)
(N)

Basic Hardware and Function

127

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
Negative pulse coil

(N)
Expression
Input

A
(N)

Function
When the input is changed form ON to OFF, the device A is set to ON for 1 scan time.
This instruction is used to detect the input changing from ON to OFF.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
When the input at last scan is OFF, sets A to OFF
When the input at last scan is ON, sets A to ON
Sets device A to OFF

Output
−
−
−

Operand
Name
X
A Device

Y
√

Device
R S T.
√ √

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D

Constant Index
I

Example

R101 comes ON for only 1 scan when X000 is changed from ON to OFF.

X000
R100

1 scan time

1 scan time

Note
• The maximum usable number in a program is 2048.
(
total)
P
N
(P)
(N)

128

T1-16S User’s Manual

J

K

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
TON

ON delay timer

Expression
Input [ A TON B ]

Output

Function
When the input is changed from OFF to ON, timer updating for the timer register B is started. The
elapsed time is stored in B. When the specified time by A has elapsed after the input came ON, the
output and the timer device corresponding to B is turned ON. (Timer updating is stopped)
When the input is changed from ON to OFF, B is cleared to 0, and the output and the timer device
are turned OFF.
The available data range for operand A is 0 to 32767.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No operation (timer is not updating)
Elapsed time < preset time (timer is updating)
Elapsed time ≥ preset time (timer is not updating)

Output
OFF
OFF
ON

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Preset time
B Elapsed time

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

0 - 32767

Example

Y021 (and the timer device T.000) is turned ON 2 seconds after X000 came ON.
X000

Note

Preset value
T000
T.000
Y021
Preset time (2s)

Less than preset time

• Time is set in 10 ms units for;
T1: T000 to T031 (0 to 327.67 s)
T1S: T000 to T063 (0 to 327.67 s)
• Time is set in 100 ms units for;
T1: T032 to T063 (0 to 3276.7 s)
T1S: T064 to T255 (0 to 3276.7 s)
• Multiple timer instructions (TON, TOF or
SS) with the same timer register are not
allowed.

Basic Hardware and Function

129

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
TOF

OFF delay timer

Expression
Input [ A TOF B ]

Output

Function
When the input is changed from OFF to ON, the output and the timer device corresponding to the
timer register B are set to ON. When the input is changed from ON to OFF, timer updating for B is
started. The elapsed time is stored in B. When the specified time by A has elapsed after the input
came OFF, the output and the timer device are turned OFF. (Timer updating is stopped)
The available data range for operand A is 0 to 32767.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
Elapsed time < preset time (timer is updating)
Elapsed time ≥ preset time (timer is not updating)
No operation (timer is not updating)

Output
ON
OFF
ON

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Preset time
B Elapsed time

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

0 - 32767

Example

Y021 (and the timer device T.002) is turned OFF 1 second after X000 came OFF.
X000

Note

Preset value
T002
T.002
Y021
Preset time (1 s)

130

T1-16S User’s Manual

• Time is set in 10 ms units for;
T1: T000 to T031 (0 to 327.67 s)
T1S: T000 to T063 (0 to 327.67 s)
• Time is set in 100 ms units for;
T1: T032 to T063 (0 to 3276.7 s)
T1S: T064 to T255 (0 to 3276.7 s)
• Multiple timer instructions (TON, TOF or
SS) with the same timer register are not
Less than preset time
allowed.

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
SS

Single shot timer

Expression
Input [ A SS B ]

Output

Function
When the input is changed from OFF to ON, the output and the timer device corresponding to the
timer register B are set to ON, and timer updating for B is started. The elapsed time is stored in B.
When the specified time by A has elapsed after the input came ON, the output and the timer device
are turned OFF. (Timer updating is stopped)
The available data range for operand A is 0 to 32767.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
Elapsed time < preset time (timer is updating)
Elapsed time ≥ preset time (timer is not updating)
Elapsed time < preset time (timer is updating)
Elapsed time ≥ preset time (timer is not updating)

Output
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Preset time
B Elapsed time

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

0 - 32767

Example

Y021 (and the timer device T.003) is turned OFF 1 second after X000 came ON.
X000

Note

Preset value
T003
T.003
Y021
Preset time (1 s)

Preset time (1 s)

• Time is set in 10 ms units for;
T1: T000 to T031 (0 to 327.67 s)
T1S: T000 to T063 (0 to 327.67 s)
• Time is set in 100 ms units for;
T1: T032 to T063 (0 to 3276.7 s)
T1S: T064 to T255 (0 to 3276.7 s)
• Multiple timer instructions (TON, TOF or
SS) with the same timer register are not
allowed.

Basic Hardware and Function

131

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
CNT

Counter

Expression
Count input

C

CNT

Enable input

E

A B

Q

Output

Function
While the enable input is ON, this instruction counts the number of the count input changes from
OFF to ON. The count value is stored in the counter register B. When the count value reaches the
set value A, the output and the counter device corresponding to B are turned ON. When the enable
input comes OFF, B is cleared to 0 and the output and the counter device are turned OFF.
The available data range for operand A is 0 to 65535.

Execution condition
Enable
Operation
input
OFF No operation (B is cleared to 0)
ON
Count value (B) < set value (A)
Count value (B) ≥ set value (A)

Output
OFF
OFF
ON

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√

A Set value
B Count value

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

0 - 65535

Example

Note
X001
X002
C010

5
3 4
1 2

C.010
Y021

132

T1-16S User’s Manual

1

2 3

• No transitional contact is required for the
count input. The count input rising edge is
detected by this instruction.
• For the count input, direct linking to a
connecting point is not allowed. In this
case, insert a dummy contact (always ON
= S04F, etc.) just before the input.
Refer to Note of Shift register FUN 074.
• Multiple counter instructions (CNT) with

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
MCS
MCR

Master control set / reset

Expression
Input

[ MCS ]
[ MCR ]

Function
When the MCS input is ON, ordinary operation is performed. When the MCS input is OFF, the state
of left power rail between MCS and MCR is turned OFF.

Execution condition
MCS
input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output

Sets OFF the left power rail until MCR
Ordinary operation

−
−

Operand
No operand is required.

Example

When X000 is OFF, Y021 and Y022 are turned OFF regardless of the states of X001 and
X002.
Equivalent circuit
X000

Note
X001

Y021

X002

Y022

• MCS and MCR must be used as a pair.
• Nesting is not allowed.

Basic Hardware and Function

133

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
JCS
JCR

Jump control set / reset

Expression
Input

[ JCS ]
[ JCR ]

Function
When the JCS input is ON, instructions between JCS and JCR are skipped (not executed). When
the JCS input is OFF, ordinary operation is performed.

Execution condition
JCS
input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output

Ordinary operation
Skips until JCR

Operand
No operand is required.

Example

When X000 is ON, the rung 2 circuit is skipped, therefore Y021 is not changed its state
regardless of the X001 state. When X000 is OFF, Y021 is controlled by the X001 state.

Note
• JCS and JCR must be used as a pair.
• Nesting is not allowed.

134

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
END

End

Expression
[ END ]

Function
Indicates the end of main program or sub-program. Instructions after the END instruction are not
executed. At least one END instruction is necessary in a program.

Execution condition
Input

Operation

Output

Operand
No operand is required.

Example

Note
• For debugging purpose, 2 or more END instructions can be written in a program.
• Instructions after END instruction are not executed. Those steps are, however, counted as used
steps.

Basic Hardware and Function

135

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 018

MOV

Data transfer

Expression
Input −[ A MOV B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of A is stored in B.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution

Output
OFF
ON

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Source
B Destination

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index
I
√
√

J
√
√

K
√
√

√

√
√

Example 1 (constant to register)

When R010 is ON, a constant data (12345) is stored in D0100 and the output is turned ON.

Example 2 (register to register)

When X005 is ON, the data of SW30 is stored in RW45 and the output is turned ON. If SW30
is 500, the data 500 is stored in RW45.

Example 3 (index modification)

When R050 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW08 is stored in the index register I and
the data of D(0000+I) is stored in YW10. If RW08 is 300, the data of D0300 is stored in YW10.

136

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 019

DMOV

Double-word data transfer

Expression
Input −[ A+1⋅A MOV B+1⋅B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the double-word (32-bit) data of A+1⋅A is stored in double-word register
B+1⋅B. The data range is -2147483648 to 2147483647.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution

Output
OFF
ON

Operand
Name
X
A Source
B Destination

Y

Device
R S T.

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index
I
√
√

J
√
√

K
√
√

√

√
√

Example

When R011 is ON, a double-word data of D0101⋅D0100 is stored in RW17⋅RW16 and the
output is turned ON. If D0101⋅D0100 is 1234567, the data 1234567 is stored in RW17⋅RW16.

Basic Hardware and Function

137

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 020

NOT

Invert transfer

Expression
Input −[ A NOT B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the bit-inverted data of A is stored in B.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
OFF
ON

No execution
Execution

Operand
Name
X

Device
R S T.

Y

A Source
B Destination

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index
I
√
√

J
√
√

K
√
√

√

Example

When R010 is ON, the bit-inverted data of RW30 is stored in D0200 and the output is turned
ON. If RW30 is H4321, the bit-inverted data (HBCDE) is stored in D0200.
F

RW30

E

D

C

B

A

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
4

3

2

1

Bit-invert

F

D0200

E

D

C

B

A

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0
B

138

9

T1-16S User’s Manual

C

D

E

√
√

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 022

XCHG

Data exchange

Expression
Input −[ A XCHG B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B is exchanged.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
OFF
ON

No execution
Execution

Operand
Name
X
A Operation data
B Operation data

Y

Device
R S T.

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √
√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index
I
√
√

J
√
√

K
√
√

√
√

Example

When R005 is ON, the data of RW23 and D0100 is exchanged. If the original data of RW23 is
23456 and that of D0100 is 291, the operation result is as follows.
RW23

23456

RW23

291

D0100

291

D0100

23456

Before operation

After operation

Basic Hardware and Function

139

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 024

TINZ

Table initialize

Expression
Input −[ A TINZ (n) B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of A is stored in n registers starting with B.
The allowable range of the table size n is 1 to 1024 words.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
OFF
ON

No execution
Execution

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Source
n Table size
B Start of
destination

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√

√

√

√

√

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

√
1 - 1024

√

Example

When R010 is ON, a constant data (0) is stored in 100 registers starting with D0200 (D0200 to
D0299) and the output is turned ON.
Constant

140

0

T1-16S User’s Manual

D0200
D0201
D0202

0
0
0

D0299

0

100 registers

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 025

TMOV

Table transfer

Expression
Input −[ A TMOV (n) B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of n registers starting with A are transferred to n registers starting
with B in a block. The allowable range of the table size n is 1 to 1024 words.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
OFF
ON

No execution
Execution

Operand
Name
X
A Start of source
n Table size
B Start of
destination

Y

Device
R S T.

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index
I

J

K
1 - 1024

√

√

√

√

√

√

Example

When R010 is ON, the data of D0500 to D0509 (10 registers) are block transferred to D1000 to
D1009, and the output is turned ON.
D0500
D0501
D0502

1111
2222
3333

D0509

12345

Block transfer

D1000
D1001
D1002

1111
2222
3333

D1009

12345

10 registers

Note
• The source and destination tables can be overlapped.

Basic Hardware and Function

141

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 026

TNOT

Table invert transfer

Expression
Input −[ A TNOT (n) B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of n registers starting with A are bit-inverted and transferred to n
registers starting with B in a block. The allowable range of the table size n is 1 to 1024 words.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
OFF
ON

No execution
Execution

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Start of source
n Table size
B Start of
destination

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index
I

J

K
1 - 1024

√

√

√

√

√

√

Example

When R010 is ON, the data of D0600 to D0604 (5 registers) are bit-inverted and transferred to
D0865 to D0869, and the output is turned ON.
D0600
D0601
D0602
D0603
D0604

H00FF
H0000
H1234
H5555
H89AB

Bit-invert
and transfer

D0865
D0866
D0867
D0868
D0869

Note
• The source and destination tables can be overlapped.

142

T1-16S User’s Manual

HFF00
HFFFF
HEDCB
HAAAA
H7654

5 registers

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 027

+

Addition

Expression
Input −[ A + B → C ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are added, and the result is stored in C.
If the result is greater than 32767, the upper limit value 32767 is stored in C, and the output is
turned ON. If the result is smaller than -32768, the lower limit value -32768 is stored in C, and the
output is turned ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution (normal)
Execution (overflow or underflow occurred)

Output
OFF
OFF
ON

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Augend
B Addend
C Sum

C. XW YW RW
√ √ √
√ √ √
√ √

SW
√
√
√

Register
T C
√ √
√ √
√ √

Constant Index
D
√
√
√

I
√
√
√

J
√
√
√

K
√
√
√

√
√

√
√
√

Example

When R005 is ON, the data of D0100 and the constant data 1000 is added, and the result is
stored in D0110.
If the data of D0100 is 12345, the result 13345 is stored in D0110, and R010 is turned OFF.
D0100

12345

+
Constant

D0110

13345

R010 is OFF

1000

If the data of D0100 is 32700, the result exceeds the limit value, therefore 32767 is stored in
D0110, and R010 is turned ON.
D0100

32700

Overflow

+
Constant

D0110

32767

R010 is ON

1000

Basic Hardware and Function

143

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
−

FUN 028

Subtraction

Expression
Input −[ A − B → C ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of B is subtracted from the data of A, and the result is stored in C.
If the result is greater than 32767, the upper limit value 32767 is stored in C, and the output is
turned ON. If the result is smaller than -32768, the lower limit value -32768 is stored in C, and the
output is turned ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution (normal)
Execution (overflow or underflow occurred)

Output
OFF
OFF
ON

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Minuend
B Subtrahend
C Difference

C. XW YW RW
√ √ √
√ √ √
√ √

SW
√
√
√

Register
T C
√ √
√ √
√ √

Constant Index
D
√
√
√

I
√
√
√

J
√
√
√

K
√
√
√

√
√

√
√
√

Example

When R005 is ON, the constant data 2500 is subtracted from the data of D0200, and the result
is stored in RW50.
If the data of D0200 is 15000, the result 12500 is stored in RW50, and R010 is turned OFF.
D0200
Constant

15000

−

RW50

12500

R010 is OFF

2500

If the data of D0200 is -31000, the result is smaller than the limit value, therefore -32768 is
stored in RW50, and R010 is turned ON.
D0100
Constant

144

-31000
2500

T1-16S User’s Manual

−

Underflow
RW50

-32768

R010 is ON

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 029

∗

Multiplication

Expression
Input −[ A ∗ B → C+1⋅C ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of A is multiplied by the data of B, and the result is stored in
double-length register C+1⋅C.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
OFF
ON

No execution
Execution

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Multiplicand
B Multiplier
C Product

C. XW YW RW
√ √ √
√ √ √
√ √

SW
√
√
√

Register
T C
√ √
√ √
√ √

Constant Index
D
√
√
√

I
√
√
√

J
√
√
√

K
√
√

√
√

√
√
√

Example

When R005 is ON, the data of D0050 is multiplied by the data of RW05, and the result is
stored in double-length register D0101⋅D0100 (upper 16-bit in D0101 and lower 16-bit in
D0100).
If the data of D0050 is 1500 and the data of RW05 is 20, the result 30000 is stored in
D0101⋅D0100.
D0050

1500

RW05

20

×

D0101⋅D0100
D0101
D0100

30000
H0000
H7530

(upper 16-bit)
(lower 16-bit)

Basic Hardware and Function

145

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 030

/

Division

Expression
Input −[ A / B → C ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of A is divided by the data of B, and the quotient is stored in C and
the remainder in C+1.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Normal execution (B ≠ 0)
No execution (B = 0)

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

ERF
−
−
Set

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Dividend
B Divisor
C Quotient

C. XW YW RW
√ √ √
√ √ √
√ √

SW
√
√
√

Register
T C
√ √
√ √
√ √

Constant Index
D
√
√
√

I
√
√
√

J
√
√
√

K
√
√
√

√
√

√
√
√

Example

When R005 is ON, the data of RW22 is divided by the constant data 325, and the quotient is
stored in RW27 and the remainder is stored in RW28.
If the data of RW22 is 2894, the quotient 8 is stored in RW27 and the remainder 294 is stored
in RW28.
RW22
Constant

2894
325

÷

RW27
RW28

8
294

(quotient)
(remainder)

Note
• If divisor (operand B) is 0, ERF (instruction error flag = S051) is set to ON.
The ERF (S051) can be reset to OFF by user program, e.g. ’[ RST S051 ]’.
• If the index register K is used as operand C, the remainder is ignored.
• If operand A is -32768 and operand B is -1, the data -32768 is stored in C and 0 is stored in
C+1.

146

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 031

D+

Double-word addition

Expression
Input −[ A+1⋅A D+ B+1⋅B → C+1⋅C ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1⋅A and B+1⋅B are added, and the result is
stored in C+1⋅C. The data range is -2147483648 to 2147483647.
If the result is greater than 2147483647, the upper limit value 2147483647 is stored in C+1⋅C, and
the output is turned ON. If the result is smaller than -2147483648, the lower limit value
-2147483648 is stored in C+1⋅C, and the output is turned ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution (normal)
Execution (overflow or underflow occurred)

Output
OFF
OFF
ON

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Augend
B Addend
C Sum

C. XW YW RW
√ √ √
√ √ √
√ √

SW
√
√
√

Register
T C
√ √
√ √
√ √

Constant Index
D
√
√
√

I

J

K
√
√

Example

When R005 is ON, the data of D0011⋅D0010 and the constant data 100000 is added, and the
result is stored in D0101⋅D0100.
If the data of D0011⋅D0010 is 300000, the result 400000 is stored in D0101⋅D0100, and R010
is turned OFF. (No overflow/underflow)
D0011⋅D0010

300000

Constant

100000

+

D0101⋅D0100

400000

R010 is OFF

Basic Hardware and Function

147

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 032

Double-word subtraction

D−

Expression
Input −[ A+1⋅A D− B+1⋅B → C+1⋅C ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the double-word data of B+1⋅B is subtracted from A+1⋅A, and the result is
stored in C+1⋅C. The data range is -2147483648 to 2147483647.
If the result is greater than 2147483647, the upper limit value 2147483647 is stored in C+1⋅C, and
the output is turned ON. If the result is smaller than -2147483648, the lower limit value
-2147483648 is stored in C+1⋅C, and the output is turned ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution (normal)
Execution (overflow or underflow occurred)

Output
OFF
OFF
ON

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Minuend
B Subtrahend
C Difference

C. XW YW RW
√ √ √
√ √ √
√ √

SW
√
√
√

Register
T C
√ √
√ √
√ √

Constant Index
D
√
√
√

I

J

K
√
√

Example

When R005 is ON, the double-word data of RW25⋅RW24 is subtracted from the double-word
data of D0101⋅D0100, and the result is stored in D0103⋅D0102.
If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 1580000 and the data of RW25⋅RW24 is 80000, the result
1500000 is stored in D0103⋅D0102, and R010 is turned OFF. (No overflow/underflow)
D0101⋅D0100
RW25⋅RW24

148

1580000
80000

T1-16S User’s Manual

−

D0103⋅D0102

1500000

R010 is OFF

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 035

+C

Addition with carry

Expression
Input −[ A +C B → C ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of A, B and the carry flag (CF = S050) are added, and the result is
stored in C. If carry is occurred in the operation, the carry flag is set to ON. If the result is greater
than 32767 or smaller than -32768, the output is turned ON.
This instruction is used to perform unsigned addition or double-length addition.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution Normal
Overflow /
underflow

No carry
Carry occurred
No carry
Carry occurred

Output
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON

CF
−
Reset
Set
Reset
Set

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Augend
B Addend
C Sum

C. XW YW RW
√ √ √
√ √ √
√ √

SW
√
√
√

Register
T C
√ √
√ √
√ √

Constant Index
D
√
√
√

I
√
√
√

J
√
√
√

K
√
√
√

√
√

√
√
√

Example

When R013 is ON, the data of double-length registers D0101⋅D0100 and RW21⋅RW20 are
added, and the result is stored in D0201⋅D0200. The RSTC is a instruction to reset the carry
flag before starting the calculation.
If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 12345678 and RW21⋅RW20 is 54322, the result 12400000 is
stored in D0201⋅D0200.
D0101⋅D0100 12345678

+
RW21⋅RW20

D0201⋅D0200

12400000

54322

Basic Hardware and Function

149

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 036

Subtraction with carry

-C

Expression
Input −[ A -C B → C ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of B and the carry flag (CF = S050) are subtracted from A, and the
result is stored in C. If borrow is occurred in the operation, the carry flag is set to ON. If the result is
greater than 32767 or smaller than -32768, the output is turned ON.
This instruction is used to perform unsigned subtraction or double-length subtraction.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution Normal
Overflow /
underflow

No borrow
Borrow occurred
No borrow
Borrow occurred

Output
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON

CF
−
Reset
Set
Reset
Set

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Minuend
B Subtrahend
C Difference

C. XW YW RW
√ √ √
√ √ √
√ √

SW
√
√
√

Register
T C
√ √
√ √
√ √

Constant Index
D
√
√
√

I
√
√
√

J
√
√
√

K
√
√
√

√
√

√
√
√

Example

When R013 is ON, the data of double-length register RW23⋅RW22 is subtracted from the data
of D0201⋅D0200, and the result is stored in D0211⋅D0210. The RSTC is a instruction to reset
the carry flag before starting the calculation.
If the data of D0201⋅D0200 is 12345678 and RW23⋅RW22 is 12340000, the result 5678 is
stored in D0211⋅D0210.
D0201⋅D0200 12345678

RW23⋅RW22

150

12340000

T1-16S User’s Manual

D0211⋅D0210

5678

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 039

Unsigned multiplication

U∗

Expression
Input −[ A U∗ B → C+1⋅C ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the unsigned data of A and B are multiplied, and the result is stored in
double-length register C+1⋅C. The data range of A and B is 0 to 65535 (unsigned 16-bit data)

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
OFF
ON

No execution
Execution

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Multiplicand
B Multiplier
C Product

C. XW YW RW
√ √ √
√ √ √
√ √

SW
√
√
√

Register
T C
√ √
√ √
√ √

Constant Index
D
√
√
√

I
√
√
√

J
√
√
√

K
√
√

√
√

√
√
√

Example

When R010 is ON, the data of D0050 is multiplied by the data of RW05, and the result is
stored in double-length register D0101⋅D0100 (upper 16-bit in D0101 and lower 16-bit in
D0100).
If the data of D0050 is 52500 and the data of RW05 is 30, the result 1575000 is stored in
D0101⋅D0100.
D0050
RW05

52500

×

D0101⋅D0100

1575000

30

Note
• This instruction handles the register data as unsigned integer.

Basic Hardware and Function

151

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 040

U/

Unsigned division

Expression
Input −[ A U/ B → C ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the unsigned data of A is divided by the unsigned data of B, and the
quotient is stored in C and the remainder in C+1.
The data range of A and B is 0 to 65535 (unsigned 16-bit data)

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Normal execution (B ≠ 0)
No execution (B = 0)

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

ERF
−
−
Set

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Dividend
B Divisor
C Quotient

C. XW YW RW
√ √ √
√ √ √
√ √

SW
√
√
√

Register
T C
√ √
√ √
√ √

Constant Index
D
√
√
√

I
√
√
√

J
√
√
√

K
√
√
√

√
√

Example

When R010 is ON, the data of D0030 is divided by the constant data 300, and the quotient is
stored in D0050 and the remainder is stored in D0051.
If the data of D0030 is 54321, the quotient 181 is stored in D0050 and the remainder 21 is
stored in D0051.
D0030
Constant

54321
300

÷

RW27
RW28

181
21

(quotient)
(remainder)

Note
• If divisor (operand B) is 0, ERF (instruction error flag = S051) is set to ON.
The ERF (S051) can be reset to OFF by user program, e.g. −[ RST S051 ]−.
• If the index register K is used as operand C, the remainder is ignored.
• This instruction handles the register data as unsigned integer.

152

T1-16S User’s Manual

√
√
√

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 041

DIV

Unsigned double/single division

Expression
Input −[ A+1⋅A DIV B → C ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1⋅A is divided by the data of B, and the quotient
is stored in C and the remainder in C+1. The data range of A+1⋅A is 0 to 4294967295, and the data
range of B and C is 0 to 65535.
If the quotient is greater than 65535 (overflow), the limit value 65535 is stored in C, 0 is stored in
C+1, and the instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Normal execution (B ≠ 0)
Overflow (B ≠ 0)
No execution (B = 0)

Output
OFF
ON
ON
OFF

ERF
−
−
Set
Set

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Dividend
B Divisor
C Quotient

C. XW YW RW
√ √ √
√ √ √
√ √

SW
√
√
√

Register
T C
√ √
√ √
√ √

Constant Index
D
√
√
√

I

J

K
√
√

Example

When R010 is ON, the double-word data of D0201⋅D0200 is divided by the constant data
4000, and the quotient is stored in D1000 and the remainder is stored in D1001.
If the data of D0201⋅D0200 is 332257, the quotient 83 is stored in D1000 and the remainder
257 is stored in D1001.
D0201⋅D0200
Constant

332257
4000

÷

D1000
D1001

83
257

(quotient)
(remainder)

Note
• If divisor (operand B) is 0, ERF (instruction error flag = S051) is set to ON.
The ERF (S051) can be reset to OFF by user program, e.g. −[ RST S051 ]−.
• This instruction handles the register data as unsigned integer.

Basic Hardware and Function

153

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 043

+1

Increment

Expression
Input −[ +1 A ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of A is increased by 1 and stored in A.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
OFF
ON

No execution
Execution

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Operation data

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

√

Example

At the rising edge of X004 changes from OFF to ON, the data of D0050 is increased by 1 and
stored in D0050.
If the data of D0050 is 750 before the execution, it will be 751 after the execution.
D0050
750

+1

D0050
751

Note
• There is no limit value for this instruction. When the data of operand A is 32767 before the
execution, it will be -32768 after the execution.

154

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 045

Decrement

-1

Expression
Input −[ -1 A ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of A is decreased by 1 and stored in A.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
OFF
ON

No execution
Execution

Operand
Name
X

Y

A Operation data

Device
R S T.

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

√

Example

At the rising edge of X005 changes from OFF to ON, the data of D0050 is decreased by 1 and
stored in D0050.
If the data of D0050 is 1022 before the execution, it will be 1021 after the execution.
D0050
1022

-1

D0050
1021

Note
• There is no limit value for this instruction. When the data of operand A is -32768 before the
execution, it will be 32767 after the execution.

Basic Hardware and Function

155

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 048

AND

AND

Expression
Input −[ A AND B → C ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, this instruction finds logical AND of A and B, and stores the result in C.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
OFF
ON

No execution
Execution

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Source
B Source
C AND

C. XW YW RW
√ √ √
√ √ √
√ √

SW
√
√
√

Register
T C
√ √
√ √
√ √

Constant Index
D
√
√
√

I
√
√
√

J
√
√
√

K
√
√
√

√
√

Example

When R012 is ON, logical AND operation is executed for the data of RW12 and the constant
data HFF00, and the result is stored in D0030.
If the data of RW12 is H3456, the result H3400 is stored in D0030.
F

RW12

E

D

C

B

A

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0
3

4

5

6

AND
Constant

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F

D0030

0

0

0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3

156

F

T1-16S User’s Manual

4

0

0

√
√
√

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 050

OR

OR

Expression
Input −[ A OR B → C ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, this instruction finds logical OR of A and B, and stores the result in C.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
OFF
ON

No execution
Execution

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Source
B source
C OR

C. XW YW RW
√ √ √
√ √ √
√ √

SW
√
√
√

Register
T C
√ √
√ √
√ √

Constant Index
D
√
√
√

I
√
√
√

J
√
√
√

K
√
√
√

√
√

√
√
√

Example

When R012 is ON, logical OR operation is executed for the data of RW13 and RW20, and the
result is stored in D0031.
If the data of RW13 is H5678 and RW20 is H4321, the result H5779 is stored in D0031.
F

RW13

E

D

C

B

A

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
5

6

7

8

OR
RW20

0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
4

D0031

3

2

1

0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1
5

7

7

9

Basic Hardware and Function

157

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 052

EOR

Exclusive OR

Expression
Input −[ A EOR B → C ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, this instruction finds exclusive OR ofA and B, and stores the result in C.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
OFF
ON

No execution
Execution

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Source
B source
C Exclusive OR

C. XW YW RW
√ √ √
√ √ √
√ √

SW
√
√
√

Register
T C
√ √
√ √
√ √

Constant Index
D
√
√
√

I
√
√
√

J
√
√
√

K
√
√
√

√
√

√
√
√

Example

When R012 is ON, exclusive OR operation is executed for the data of D1000 and D0300, and
the result is stored in D1000.
If the data of D1000 is H5678 and D0300 is H4321, the result H1559 is stored in D1000.
F

D1000

E

D

C

B

5

D0300

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

6
7
Exclusive OR

8

3

2

1

0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1
1

158

9

0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
4

D1000

A

0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0

T1-16S User’s Manual

5

5

9

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 056

MAVE

Moving average

Expression
Input −[ A MAVE (n) B → C ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, this instruction calculates the average value of the latest n scan’s register A
data, and stores it in C. The allowable range of n is 1 to 64.
This instruction is useful for filtering the analog input signal.
The latest n scan’s data of A are stored in n registers starting with B, and C+1 are used as pointer.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
OFF
ON

No execution
Execution

Operand
Name
X
A
n
B
C

Y

Device
R S T.

Input data
Data size
Start of table
Output data

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√
√

√
√

√
√

√
√

√
√

√
√

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

√

√

K
√

√
1 - 64

Example

The latest 5 scan’s data of XW04 is stored in D0900 to D0904 (5 registers), and the average
value of them is calculated and stored in D0010.
D0011 is used as internal work data.

1st scan
2nd scan
3rd scan
4th scan
5th scan
6th scan
7th scan
8th scan

XW04
1000
1005
1009
1012
1007
1004
998
994

D0010
200
401
603
805
1006
1007
1006
1003

= (1000) / 5
= (1000 + 1005) / 5
= (1000 + 1005 + 1009) / 5
= (1000 + 1005 + 1009 + 1012) / 5
= (1000 + 1005 + 1009 + 1012 + 1007) / 5
= (1005 + 1009 + 1012 + 1007 + 1004) / 5
= (1009 + 1012 + 1007 + 1004 + 998) / 5
= (1012 + 1007 + 1004 + 998 + 994) / 5

Basic Hardware and Function

159

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 061

DFL

Digital Filter

Expression
Input −[ A DFL B → C ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, this instruction calculates the following formula to perform digital filtering for
input data A by filter constant by B, and stores the result in C.
yn = (1 − FL) × xn + FL × yn − 1

Here; xn is input data specified by A
FL is filter constant, 1/10000 of data specified by B (data range: 0 to 9999)
yn is output data to be stored in C
yn-1 is output data at last scan
This instruction is useful for filtering the analog input signal. C+1 is used for internal work data.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution (FL is limited within the range of 0 to
9999)

Output
OFF
ON

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Input data
B Filter constant
C Output data

C. XW YW RW
√ √ √
√ √ √
√ √

SW
√
√
√

Register
T C
√ √
√ √
√ √

Constant Index
D
√
√
√

I
√

J
√

K
√

Example

The filtered data of XW04 is stored in D0110. (D0111 is used for internal work data)
When D0100 value is small
XW04

D0110

D0110

Time

160

T1-16S User’s Manual

When D0100 value is large
XW04

Time

√

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 062

HTOA

Hex to ASCII conversion

Expression
Input −[ A HTOA (n) B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the hexadecimal data of n registers starting with A is converted into ASCII
characters and stored in B and after. The uppermost digit of source A is stored in lower byte of
destination B, and followed in this order. The allowable range of n is 1 to 32.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
OFF
ON

No execution
Execution

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Source
n Data size
B Destination

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√

√

√

√

√

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

√
1 - 32

√

Example

When R010 is ON, 4 words data of D0100 to D0103 are converted into ASCII characters, and
stored in 8 words registers starting with D0200.
F

D0100
D0101
D0102
D0103

0

H0123
H4567
H89AB
HCDEF

F

Converted

D0220
D0221
D0222
D0223
D0224
D0225
D0226
D0227

8 7

“1” (H31)
“3” (H33)
“5” (H35)
“7” (H37)
“9” (H39)
“B” (H42)
“D” (H44)
“F” (H46)

0

“0” (H30)
“2” (H32)
“4” (H34)
“6” (H36)
“8” (H38)
“A” (H41)
“C” (H43)
“E” (H45)

Note
• If index register (I, J or K) is used for the operand A, only n = 1 is allowed. Otherwise,
boundary error will occur.

Basic Hardware and Function

161

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 063

ATOH

ASCII to Hex conversion

Expression
Input −[ A ATOH (n) B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the ASCII characters stored in n registers starting with A is converted into
hexadecimal data and stored in B and after. The lower byte of source A is stored as uppermost
digit of destination B, and followed in this order. The allowable ASCII character in the source table
is “0” (H30) to “9” (H39) and “A” (H41) to “F” (H46). The allowable range of n is 1 to 64.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Normal execution
Conversion data error (no execution)

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

ERF
−
−
Set

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Source
n Data size
B Destination

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√

√

√

√

√

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

√
1 - 64

√

Example

When R011 is ON, the ASCII characters stored in 8 words of D0300 to D0307 are converted
into hexadecimal data, and stored in 4 words registers starting with RW040.
F

D0300
D0301
D0302
D0303
D0304
D0305
D0306
D0307

8 7

“1” (H31)
“3” (H33)
“5” (H35)
“7” (H37)
“9” (H39)
“B” (H42)
“D” (H44)
“F” (H46)

0

“0” (H30)
“2” (H32)
“4” (H34)
“6” (H36)
“8” (H38)
“A” (H41)
“C” (H43)
“E” (H45)

F

Converted

RW040
RW041
RW042
RW043

0

H0123
H4567
H89AB
HCDEF

Note
• If index register (I, J or K) is used for the operand A, only n = 1 is allowed.
• If n is odd number, lower 2 digits of the last converted data will not be fixed, Use even for n.

162

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 064

TEST

Bit test

Expression
Input −[ A TEST B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, this instruction finds logical AND of A and B. Then if the result is not 0, sets
the output to ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

No execution
Execution When the result is not 0
When the result is 0

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Source
B Test data

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index
I
√
√

J
√
√

K
√
√

√
√

√
√

Example

Logical AND operation is executed for the data of RW07 and the constant data H0FFF, and if
the result is not 0, R00A is turned ON. (R00A is turned ON when any device from R070 to
R07B is ON.)
If the data of RW07 is H4008, R00A is turned ON.
F

RW07

E

D

C

B

A

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
4

0

0

8

AND
Constant

0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0

F

F

F
Result is not 0

Result

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

R00A comes ON

Basic Hardware and Function

163

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 068

SHR1

1 bit shift right

Expression
Input −[ SHR1 A ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of register A is shifted 1 bit to the right (LSB direction). 0 is stored in
the left most bit (MSB). The pushed out bit state is stored in the carry flag (CF = S050). After the
operation, if the right most bit (LSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution When LSB = 1
When LSB = 0

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

CF
−
Set or reset
Set or reset

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Operation data

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

Example

When X007 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW15 is shifted 1 bit to the right.
The figure below shows an operation example.
(MSB)
F

RW15

RW15
(Result)

(LSB)
E

D

C

B

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0

0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

0

164

A

T1-16S User’s Manual

CF
0

R001 is turned ON

√

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 069

SHL1

1 bit shift left

Expression
Input −[ SHL1 A ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of register A is shifted 1 bit to the left (MSB direction). 0 is stored in
the right most bit (LSB). The pushed out bit state is stored in the carry flag (CF = S050). After the
operation, if the left most bit (MSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution When MSB = 1
When MSB = 0

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

CF
−
Set or reset
Set or reset

Operand
Name
X

Device
R S T.

Y

A Operation data

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

√

Example

When X008 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW15 is shifted 1 bit to the left.
The figure below shows an operation example.
(MSB)
F

CF
1

(LSB)
E

D

C

B

A

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0

RW15

1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0

RW15 (Result)

R002 is turned ON

0

Basic Hardware and Function

165

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 070

SHR

n bit shift right

Expression
Input −[ A SHR n → B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of register A is shifted n bits to the right (LSB direction) including
the carry flag (CF = S050), and stored in B. 0 is stored in upper n bits. After the operation, if the
right most bit (LSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution When LSB = 1
When LSB = 0

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

CF
−
Set or reset
Set or reset

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Source
n Shift bits
B Destination

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√

√

√

√

√

√

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

√

√

√

√
1 - 16

√
√

Example

When X007 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW18 is shifted 5 bits to the right and the
result is stored in RW20.
The figure below shows an operation example.
(MSB)
F

(LSB)
E

D

C

B

A

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

RW18

0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0

RW20
(Result)

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

0

166

T1-16S User’s Manual

CF
1

R001 is turned OFF

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 071

SHL

n bit shift left

Expression
Input −[ A SHL n → B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of register A is shifted n bits to the left (MSB direction) including the
carry flag (CF = S050), and stored in B. 0 is stored in lower n bits. After the operation, if the left
most bit (MSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution When MSB = 1
When MSB = 0

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

CF
−
Set or reset
Set or reset

Operand
Name
X

Device
R S T.

Y

A Source
n Shift bits
B Destination

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√

√

√

√

√

√

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

√

√

√

√
1 - 16

√
√

Example

When X008 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW18 is shifted 3 bits to the left and the
result is stored in RW20.
The figure below shows an operation example.
(MSB)
F

CF
1

(LSB)
E

D

C

B

A

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0

RW18

0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0

RW20 (Result)

R002 is turned OFF

0

Basic Hardware and Function

167

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 074

SR

Shift register

Expression
Data input
− D SR Q − Output
Shift input
− S (n)
A
Enable input − E

Function
While the enable input is ON, this instruction shifts the data of the bit table, size n starting with A,
1 bit to the left (upper address direction) when the shift input is ON. The state of the data input is
stored in A. The pushed out bit state is stored in the carry flag (CF = S050).
When the enable input is OFF, all bits in the table and the carry flag are reset to OFF.

Execution condition
Enable
Operation
input
OFF Resets all bits in the bit table
ON
When the shift input is ON
When the shift input is OFF

Shift execution
No execution

Output

CF

OFF
Last bit
state

Reset
Set or reset
−

Operand
Name
X
A Leading device
n Device size

Y
√

Device
R S T.
√ √

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D

Constant Index
I

J

K
1 - 64

Example

32 devices starting with R100 (R100 to R11F) is specified as a shift register.
When R010 is OFF, the data of the shift register is reset to 0. (R100 to R11F are reset to OFF)
The carry flag (CF = S050) is also reset to OFF.
While R010 is ON, the data of the shift register is shifted 1 bit to the upper address direction
when X009 is changed from OFF to ON. At the same time, the state of X008 is stored in the
leading bit (R100).
The output (R011) indicates the state of the last bit (R11F).

168

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
The figure below shows an operation example. (When X009 is changed from OFF to ON)

CF

1

R11F R11E R11D R11C

1

0

0

0

0

1

R103 R102 R101 R100

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

0

X008

0

Shift result

R011 is turned OFF

Note
• When the shift input is ON, the shift operation is performed every scan. Use a transitional
contact for the shift input to detect the state changing.
• For the data input and the shift input, direct linking to a connecting point is not allowed. In this
case, insert a dummy contact (always ON special device = S04F, etc.) just before the input.

( )
D
S

SR
(n)

Not allowed

Q

A

E

Dummy contact
( )
D
S
E

SR
(n)

Q

Allowed

A

Basic Hardware and Function

169

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 075

DSR

Bi-directional shift register

Expression
Data input
Shift input
Enable input
Direction input

− D DSR Q − Output
− S (n)
−E
−L
A

Function
While the enable input (E) is ON, this instruction shifts the data of the bit table, size n starting with
A, 1 bit when the shift input (S) is ON. The shift direction is determined by the state of the direction
input (L).
When L is OFF, the direction is right (lower address direction).
When L is ON, the direction is left (upper address direction).
The state of the data input (D) is stored in the highest bit if right shift, and stored in the lowest bit A
if left shift. The pushed out bit state is stored in the carry flag (CF = S050).
When the enable input (E) is OFF, all bits in the table and the carry flag are reset to OFF.

Execution condition
Enable
Operation
input
OFF Resets all bits in the bit table
ON
S = ON
L = ON
Shift left execution
L = OFF
Shift right execution
S = OFF No execution

Output

CF

OFF
Reset
Highest bit state Set or reset
Lowest bit state Set or reset
Highest bit state
−

Operand
Name
X
A Leading device
n Device size

Y
√

Device
R S T.
√ √

Example

170

T1-16S User’s Manual

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D

Constant Index
I

J

K
1 - 64

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
9 devices starting with R200 (R200 to R208) is specified as a shift register.
When R010 is OFF, the data of the shift register is reset to 0. (R200 to R208 are reset to OFF)
The carry flag (CF = S050) is also reset to OFF.
While R010 is ON the following operation is enabled.
• When X00A is ON (shift left), the data of the shift register is shifted 1 bit to the upper
address direction when X009 is changed from OFF to ON. At the same time, the state of
X008 is stored in the leading bit (R200). The output (R012) indicates the state of the highest
bit (R208).
• When X00A is OFF (shift right), the data of the shift register is shifted 1 bit to the lower
address direction when X009 is changed from OFF to ON. At the same time, the state of
X008 is stored in the highest bit (R208). The output (R012) indicates the state of the lowest
bit (R200).
The figure below shows an operation example.
(When X00A is ON and X009 is changed from OFF to ON)
CF

1

R208 R207 R206 R205 R204 R203 R202 R201 R200

X008

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

Shift result

R012 is turned OFF
(When X00A is OFF and X009 is changed from OFF to ON)
X008

1

Shift result

R208 R207 R206 R205 R204 R203 R202 R201 R200

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

CF

0

R012 is turned ON

Note
• When the shift input is ON, the shift operation is performed every scan. Use a transitional
contact for the shift input to detect the state changing.
• For the data input, the shift input and the enable input, direct linking to a connecting point is not
allowed. In this case, insert a dummy contact (always ON special device = S04F, etc.) just
before the input. Refer to Note of Shift register FUN 074.

Basic Hardware and Function

171

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 078

RTR1

1 bit rotate right

Expression
Input −[ RTR1 A ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of register A is rotated 1 bit to the right (LSB direction). The pushed
out bit state is stored in the left most bit (MSB) and in the carry flag (CF = S050). After the
operation, if the right most bit (LSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution When LSB = 1
When LSB = 0

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

CF
−
Set or reset
Set or reset

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Operation data

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

Example

When X007 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW15 is rotated 1 bit to the right.
The figure below shows an operation example.
(MSB)
F

(LSB)
E

D

C

B

A

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

RW15

0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0

RW15
(Result)

0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

CF
0

R001 is turned ON

172

T1-16S User’s Manual

√

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 079

RTL1

1 bit rotate left

Expression
Input −[ RTL1 A ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of register A is rotated 1 bit to the left (MSB direction). The pushed
out bit state is stored in the right most bit (LSB) and in the carry flag (CF = S050). After the
operation, if the left most bit (MSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution When MSB = 1
When MSB = 0

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

CF
−
Set or reset
Set or reset

Operand
Name
X

Device
R S T.

Y

A Operation data

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

√

Example

When X008 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW15 is rotated 1 bit to the left.
The figure below shows an operation example.
(MSB)
F

CF
1

(LSB)
E

D

C

B

A

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0

RW15

1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1

RW15 (Result)

R002 is turned ON

Basic Hardware and Function

173

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 080

RTR

n bit rotate right

Expression
Input −[ A RTR n → B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of register A is rotated n bits to the right (LSB direction), and stored
in B. After the operation, if the right most bit (LSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution When LSB = 1
When LSB = 0

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

CF
−
Set or reset
Set or reset

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Source
n Shift bits
B Destination

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√

√

√

√

√

√

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

√

√

√

√
1 - 16

√
√

Example

When X007 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW18 is rotated 5 bits to the right and the
result is stored in RW20.
The figure below shows an operation example.

∗

(MSB)
F

(LSB)
E

D

C

B

A

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

RW18

0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0

RW20
(Result)

1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

∗

174

T1-16S User’s Manual

CF
1

R001 is turned OFF

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 081

RTL

n bit rotate left

Expression
Input −[ A RTL n → B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of register A is rotated n bits to the left (MSB direction), and stored
in B. After the operation, if the left most bit (MSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution When MSB = 1
When MSB = 0

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

CF
−
Set or reset
Set or reset

Operand
Name
X

Device
R S T.

Y

A Source
n Shift bits
B Destination

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√

√

√

√

√

√

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

√

√

√

√
1 - 16

√
√

Example

When X008 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW18 is rotated 3 bits to the left and the
result is stored in RW20.
The figure below shows an operation example.

∗
(MSB)
F

CF
1

(LSB)
E

D

C

B

A

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0

RW18

0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

RW20 (Result)

R002 is turned OFF

∗

Basic Hardware and Function

175

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 090

MPX

Multiplexer

Expression
Input −[ A MPX (n) B → C ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of the register which is designated by B in the table, size n starting
with A, is transferred to C.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Normal execution
Pointer over (no execution)

Output
OFF
OFF
ON

Operand
Name
X
A
n
B
C

Device
R S T.

Y

Start of table
Table size
Pointer
Destination

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√

√
√

√
√

√
√

√
√

√
√

√
√

Constant Index
I

√
√

J

√
√

K

√
√

1 - 64
0 - 63

Example

When R010 is ON, the register data which is designated by RW30 is read from the table
D0500 to D0509 (10 registers size), and stored in D0005.
If the data of RW30 is 7, D0507 data is transferred to D0005.
Source table
D0500
D0501
D0507
D0508
D0509

12345

Pointer
0
1

Destination
D0005

12345

7
8
9

Note
• If the pointer data designates outside the table (10 or more in the above example), the transfer
is not executed and the output comes ON.
• The table must be within the effective range of the register address.

176

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 091

DPX

Demultiplexer

Expression
Input −[ A DPX (n) B → C ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of A is transferred to the register which is designated by B in the
table, size n starting with C.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Normal execution
Pointer over (no execution)

Output
OFF
OFF
ON

Operand
Name
X
A
n
B
C

Source
Table size
Pointer
Start of table

Y

Device
R S T.

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√

√
√

√
√

√
√

√
√

√
√

√
√

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

√

√

√

√
1 - 64
0 - 63

Example

When R011 is ON, the data of XW04 is transferred to the register which is designated by
RW30 in the table D0500 to D0509 (10 registers size).
If the data of RW30 is 8, XW04 data is transferred to D0508.
Source
XW04

3210

Destination table
D0500
D0501
D0507
D0508
D0509

3210

Pointer
0
1
7
8
9

Note
• If the pointer data designates outside the table (10 or more in the above example), the transfer
is not executed and the output comes ON.
• The table must be within the effective range of the register address.

Basic Hardware and Function

177

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 096

>

Greater than

Expression
Input −[ A > B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is greater than B, the
output is turned ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

A>B
A≤B

Operand
Name
X

Device
R S T.

Y

A Compared
data
B Reference
data

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√

√

√

√

√

√

√

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data 2500, and if the data
of D0125 is greater than 2500, R020 is turned ON.
If the data of D0125 is 3000, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON.
D0125

3000

>

Constant

2500

R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is -100, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.
D0125

-100

≤

Constant

2500

Note
• This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

178

T1-16S User’s Manual

R020 is OFF

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 097

>=

Greater than or equal

Expression
Input −[ A >= B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is greater than or
equal to B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

A≥B
A

Not equal

Expression
Input −[ A <> B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is not equal to B, the
output is turned ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

A≠B
A=B

Operand
Name
X

Device
R S T.

Y

A Compared
data
B Reference
data

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√

√

√

√

√

√

√

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data 0, and if the data of
D0125 is not 0, R020 is turned ON.
If the data of D0125 is 10, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON.
D0125

10

≠

Constant

0

R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is 0, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.
D0125

0

=

Constant

0

R020 is OFF

Note
• This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

Basic Hardware and Function

181

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 100

<

Less than

Expression
Input −[ A < B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is less than B, the
output is turned ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

AB

Operand
Name
X

Device
R S T.

Y

A Compared
data
B Reference
data

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√

√

√

√

√

√

√

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data -100, and if the data
of D0125 is less than or equal to -100, R020 is turned ON.
If the data of D0125 is -150, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON.
D0125

-150

<

Constant

-100

R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is 0, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.
D0125

0

≥

Constant

-100

R020 is OFF

Note
• This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

Basic Hardware and Function

183

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 102

Double-word greater than

D>

Expression
Input −[ A+1⋅A D> B+1⋅B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1⋅A and B+1⋅B are compared, and if A+1⋅A is
greater than B+1⋅B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

A+1⋅A > B+1⋅B
A+1⋅A ≤ B+1⋅B

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Compared
data
B Reference
data

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√

√

√

√

√

√

√

Constant Index
I

J

K
√
√

Example

When R010 is ON, the data of D0101⋅D0100 is compared with the constant data 200000, and
if the data of D0101⋅D0100 is greater than 200000, R014 is turned ON.
If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 250000, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R014 is
turned ON.
D0101⋅D0100

250000

>

Constant

200000

R014 is ON

If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is -100, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R014 is
turned OFF.
D0101⋅D0100

-100

≤

Constant

200000

R014 is OFF

Note
• This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647).

184

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 103

Double-word greater than or equal

D>=

Expression
Input −[ A+1⋅A D>= B+1⋅B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1⋅A and B+1⋅B are compared, and if A+1⋅A is
greater than or equal to B+1⋅B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

A+1⋅A ≥ B+1⋅B
A+1⋅A < B+1⋅B

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Compared
data
B Reference
data

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√

√

√

√

√

√

Constant Index
I

J

K
√

√

√

Example

When R010 is ON, the double-word data of D0101⋅D0100 is compared with the double-word
data of D0251⋅D0250, and if the data of D0101⋅D0100 is greater than or equal to the data of
D0251⋅D0250, R014 is turned ON.
If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 250000 and D0251⋅D0250 is 200000, R014 is turned ON.
D0101⋅D0100

250000

≥

D0251⋅D0250

200000

R014 is ON

If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is -100 and D0251⋅D0250 is 0, R014 is turned OFF.
D0101⋅D0100

-100

<

D0251⋅D0250

0

R014 is OFF

Note
• This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647).

Basic Hardware and Function

185

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 104

Double-word equal

D=

Expression
Input −[ A+1⋅A D= B+1⋅B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1⋅A and B+1⋅B are compared, and if A+1⋅A is
equal to B+1⋅B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

A+1⋅A = B+1⋅B
A+1⋅A ≠ B+1⋅B

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Compared
data
B Reference
data

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√

√

√

√

√

√

Constant Index
I

J

K
√

√

√

Example

When R010 is ON, the double-word data of D0101⋅D0100 is compared with the double-word
data of D0251⋅D0250, and if the data of D0101⋅D0100 is equal to the data of D0251⋅D0250,
R014 is turned ON.
If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 250000 and D0251⋅D0250 is 250000, R014 is turned ON.
D0101⋅D0100

250000

=

D0251⋅D0250

250000

R014 is ON

If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is -100 and D0251⋅D0250 is 0, R014 is turned OFF.
D0101⋅D0100

-100

≠

D0251⋅D0250

0

R014 is OFF

Note
• This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647).

186

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 105

Double-word not equal

D<>

Expression
Input −[ A+1⋅A D<> B+1⋅B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1⋅A and B+1⋅B are compared, and if A+1⋅A is not
equal to B+1⋅B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

A+1⋅A ≠ B+1⋅B
A+1⋅A = B+1⋅B

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Compared
data
B Reference
data

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√

√

√

√

√

√

Constant Index
I

J

K
√

√

√

Example

When R010 is ON, the double-word data of D0101⋅D0100 is compared with the double-word
data of D0251⋅D0250, and if the data of D0101⋅D0100 is not equal to the data of
D0251⋅D0250, R014 is turned ON.
If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 250000 and D0251⋅D0250 is 200000, R014 is turned ON.
D0101⋅D0100

250000

≠

D0251⋅D0250

250000

R014 is ON

If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is -100 and D0251⋅D0250 is -100, R014 is turned OFF.
D0101⋅D0100

-100

=

D0251⋅D0250

-100

R014 is OFF

Note
• This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647).

Basic Hardware and Function

187

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 106

Double-word less than

D<

Expression
Input −[ A+1⋅A D< B+1⋅B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1⋅A and B+1⋅B are compared, and if A+1⋅A is
less than B+1⋅B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

A+1⋅A < B+1⋅B
A+1⋅A ≥ B+1⋅B

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Compared
data
B Reference
data

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√

√

√

√

√

√

√

Constant Index
I

J

K
√
√

Example

When R010 is ON, the data of D0101⋅D0100 is compared with the constant data 427780, and
if the data of D0101⋅D0100 is less than 427780, R014 is turned ON.
If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 250000, R014 is turned ON.
D0101⋅D0100

250000

<

Constant

427780

R014 is ON

If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 430000, R014 is turned OFF.
D0101⋅D0100

430000

≥

Constant

427780

R014 is OFF

Note
• This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647).

188

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 107

Double-word less than or equal

D<=

Expression
Input −[ A+1⋅A D<= B+1⋅B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1⋅A and B+1⋅B are compared, and if A+1⋅A is
less than or equal to B+1⋅B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

A+1⋅A ≤ B+1⋅B
A+1⋅A > B+1⋅B

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Compared
data
B Reference
data

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√

√

√

√

√

√

√

Constant Index
I

J

K
√
√

Example

When R010 is ON, the data of D0101⋅D0100 is compared with the constant data 0, and if the
data of D0101⋅D0100 is less than or equal to 0, R014 is turned ON.
If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is -1, R014 is turned ON.
D0101⋅D0100

-1

≤

Constant

0

R014 is ON

0

R014 is OFF

If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 10000, R014 is turned OFF.
D0101⋅D0100

10000

>

Constant

Note
• This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647).

Basic Hardware and Function

189

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 108

Unsigned greater than

U>

Expression
Input −[ A U> B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is greater than B, the
output is turned ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

A>B
A≤B

Operand
Name
X

Device
R S T.

Y

A Compared
data
B Reference
data

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√

√

√

√

√

√

√

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data 40000, and if the
data of D0125 is greater than 40000, R020 is turned ON.
If the data of D0125 is 52000, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON.
D0125

52000

>

Constant 40000

R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is 21000, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned
OFF.
D0125

21000

≤

Constant 40000

Note
• This instruction deals with the data as unsigned integer (0 to 65535).

190

T1-16S User’s Manual

R020 is OFF

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 109

Unsigned greater than or equal

U>=

Expression
Input −[ A >= B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is greater than or
equal to B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

A≥B
A

Expression
Input −[ A U<> B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is not equal to B, the
output is turned ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

A≠B
A=B

Operand
Name
X

Device
R S T.

Y

A Compared
data
B Reference
data

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√

√

√

√

√

√

√

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data 0, and if the data of
D0125 is not 0, R020 is turned ON.
If the data of D0125 is 41000, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON.
D0125

41000

≠

Constant

0

R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is 0, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.
D0125

0

=

Constant

0

R020 is OFF

Note
• This instruction deals with the data as unsigned integer (0 to 65535).

Basic Hardware and Function

193

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 112

Unsigned less than

U<

Expression
Input −[ A U< B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is less than B, the
output is turned ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

AB

Operand
Name
X

Device
R S T.

Y

A Compared
data
B Reference
data

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√

√

√

√

√

√

√

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data 35000, and if the
data of D0125 is less than or equal to 35000, R020 is turned ON.
If the data of D0125 is 35000, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON.
D0125

35000

≤

Constant 35000

R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is 0, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.
D0125

38000

>

Constant 35000

R020 is OFF

Note
• This instruction deals with the data as unsigned integer (0 to 65535).

Basic Hardware and Function

195

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 114

SET

Device/register set

Expression
Input −[ SET A ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the device A is set to ON if A is a device, or the data HFFFF is stored in the
register A if A is a register.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution

Output
OFF
ON

Operand
Name
X
A Device or
register

Y
√

Device
R S T.
√ √

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

Example 1 (device set)

When R010 is ON, R025 is set to ON. The state of R025 is remained even if R010 comes
OFF.

Example 2 (register set)

When R010 is ON, the data HFFFF is stored in RW20. (R200 to R20F are set to ON)
The state of RW20 is remained even if R010 comes OFF.

196

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 115

RST

Device/register reset

Expression
Input −[ RST A ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the device A is reset to OFF ifA is a device, or the data 0 is stored in the
register A if A is a register.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution

Output
OFF
ON

Operand
Name
X
A Device or
register

Y
√

Device
R S T.
√ √

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

Example 1 (device reset)

When R011 is ON, R005 is reset to OFF. The state of R025 is remained even if R011 comes
OFF.

Example 2 (register reset)

When R011 is ON, the data 0 is stored in RW20. (R200 to R20F are reset to OFF)
The state of RW20 is remained even if R011 comes OFF.

Basic Hardware and Function

197

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 118

SETC

Set carry

Expression
Input −[ SETC ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the carry flag (CF = S050) is set to ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution

Output
OFF
ON

CF
−
Set

Operand
No operand is required.

Example

When R011 is changed from OFF to ON, the carry flag S050 is set to ON.

198

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 119

RSTC

Reset carry

Expression
Input −[ RSTC ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the carry flag (CF = S050) is reset to OFF.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution

Output
OFF
ON

CF
−
Reset

Operand
No operand is required.

Example

When R010 is changed from OFF to ON, the carry flag S050 is reset to OFF.

Basic Hardware and Function

199

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 120

ENC

Encode

Expression
Input −[ A ENC (n) B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, this instruction finds the bit position of the most significant ON bit in the bit
table, size 2n bits starting with 0 bit (LSB) of A, and stores it in B.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

No execution
Normal execution
There is no ON bit (no execution)

ERF
−
−
Set

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Start of table
n Table size
B Encode result

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index
I

J

K

√

√

√

1-8
√

√

√

√

√

√

Example

25 (=32) bits starting with 0 bit of RW05 (R050 to R06F) are defined as the bit table.
When R010 is ON, the most significant ON (1) bit position in the bit table is searched, and the
position is stored in D0010.
The following figure shows an operation example.
RW06

RW05

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0

0 0 1 0

D0010

26

Note
• If there is no ON bit in the bit table, the instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON.

200

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 121

DEC

Decode

Expression
Input −[ A DEC (n) B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, this instruction sets the bit position which is designated by lower n bits of A
to ON in the bit table, size 2 n bits starting with 0 bit (LSB) of B, and resets all other bits to OFF.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
OFF
ON

No execution
Execution

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Decode source
n Table size
B Start of table

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√
1-8

√

√

√

√

√

√

Example

25 (=32) bits starting with 0 bit of RW05 (R050 to R06F) are defined as the bit table.
When R011 is ON, the bit position designated by lower 5 bits of D0011 in the bit table is set to
ON, and all other bits in the table are reset to OFF.
The following figure shows an operation example.
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4

D0011

3 2 1 0

1 1 0 0 0
Ignored

H18 (=24)

Sets ON
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0

RW06

RW05

Basic Hardware and Function

201

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 122

BC

Bit count

Expression
Input −[ A BC B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, this instruction counts the number of ON (1) bits of A, and stores the result
in B.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
OFF
ON

No execution
Execution

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Source
B Count data

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

√

Example

When R020 is ON, the number of ON (1) bits of the register RW032 is counted, and the result
is stored in D0102.
The following figure shows an operation example.
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4

3 2 1 0

RW032 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0
Counts the number of ON (1) bits = 7

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4

D0102

3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

The result data (7) is stored in binary

202

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 128

CALL

Subroutine call

Expression
Input −[ CALL N. n ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, this instruction calls the subroutine number n.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution

Output
OFF
ON

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D

Constant Index
I

J

K
√ (Note)

n Subroutine
number

Example

When X007 is ON, the subroutine number 8 is called. When the program execution is returned
from the subroutine, the output is turned ON.
Main program
| | [ CALL N.008 ]

Subroutine
[ SUBR (008)]

[ RET ]

Note
• The possible subroutine number is 0 to 15 (T1) or 0 to 255 (T1S).
• Refer to the SUBR instruction (FUN 137).
• In case of T1, nesting of subroutines is not allowed. That is, the CALL instruction cannot be
used in a subroutine.
• In case of T1S, nesting of subroutines is possible. (up to 3 levels)
• The CALL instruction can be used in an interrupt program. However, it is not allowed that the
same subroutine is called from an interrupt program and from main program.

Basic Hardware and Function

203

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 129

RET

Subroutine return

Expression
−−[ RET ]−

Function
This instruction indicates the end of a subroutine. When program execution is reached this
instruction, it is returned to the original CALL instruction.

Execution condition
Input
-

Operation
Execution

Output
-

Operand
No operand is required.

Example

Main program
| | [ CALL N.008 ]

Subroutine
[ SUBR (008)]

[ RET ]

Note
• Refer to the SUBR instruction (FUN 137).
• The RET instruction can be programmed only in the program type ‘Subroutine’.
• The RET instruction must be connected directly to the left power rail.

204

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 132

FOR

FOR (FOR-NEXT loop)

Expression
Input −[ FOR n ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the program segment between FOR and NEXT is executed n times
repeatedly in a scan.
When the input is OFF, the repetition is not performed. (the segment is executed once)

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No repetition
Repetition

Output
OFF
ON

Operand
Name
X

Y

n Repetition
times

Device
R S T.

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

1 - 32767

Example

This segment is executed 30 times repeatedly in a scan.

When R005 is ON, the program segment between FOR and NEXT is executed 30 times in a
scan.
R005
| | [ FOR 30 ]

Executed 30 times in a scan when
R005 is ON.
[ NEXT ]

Basic Hardware and Function

205

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 133

NEXT

NEXT (FOR-NEXT loop)

Expression
Input −[ NEXT ]− Output

Function
This instruction configures a FOR-NEXT loop.
If the input is OFF, The repetition is forcibly broken. and the program execution is moved to the
next instruction.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
Forcibly breaks the repetition
Repetition

Output
OFF
ON

Operand
No operand is required.

Example

When R005 is ON, the program segment between FOR and NEXT is executed 30 times in a
scan. In the above example, the rung 3 is executed 30 times. As a result, the data of D0000 to
D0029 are transferred to D0500 to D0529. (Block transfer)

Note
• The FOR instruction must be used with a corresponding NEXT instruction one by one.
• Nesting of the FOR-NEXT loop is not allowed. That is, the FOR instruction cannot be used in a
FOR-NEXT loop.
• The FOR and NEXT instructions cannot be programmed on the same rung.
• The following connection is not allowed.
||

[ FOR n ]
||

206

T1-16S User’s Manual

||

[ NEXT ]
||

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 137

SUBR

Subroutine entry

Expression
−[ SUBR (n) ]−−

Function
This instruction indicates the begging of a subroutine.

Execution condition
Input
-

Operation

Output
-

Execution

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D

Constant Index
I

J

K
√ (Note)

n Subroutine
number

Example

The begging of the subroutine number 8 is indicated.
Main program
| | [ CALL N.008 ]

Subroutine
[ SUBR (008)]

[ RET ]

Note
•
•
•
•

The possible subroutine number is 0 to 15 (T1) or 0 to 255 (T1S).
Refer to the CALL instruction (FUN 128) and the RET instruction (FUN 129).
The SUBR instruction can be programmed only in the program type ‘Subroutine’.
Nesting of subroutine is not allowed. That is, the CALL instruction cannot be used in a
subroutine.
• No other instruction cannot be placed on the rung of the SUBR instruction.

Basic Hardware and Function

207

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 140

EI

Enable interrupt

Expression
Input −[ EI ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, this instruction enables the execution of user designated interrupt operation,
i.e. timer interrupt program and I/O interrupt programs.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution

Output
OFF
ON

Operand
No operand is required.

Example

In the above example, the DI instruction disables the interrupt. Then the EI instruction enables
the interrupt again. As a result, the rung 2 instructions can be executed without interruption
between each instructions.

Note
• Refer to the DI instruction (FUN 141).
• If an interrupt factor is occurred during the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt is kept waiting
and it will be executed just after the EI instruction is executed.
• The EI instruction can be used only in the main program.

208

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 141

DI

Disable interrupt

Expression
Input −[ DI ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, this instruction disables the execution of user designated interrupt operation,
i.e. timer interrupt program and I/O interrupt programs.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution

Output
OFF
ON

Operand
No operand is required.

Example

In the above example, the interrupt is disabled when R000 is ON, and it is enabled when R000
is OFF.

Note
• Refer to the EI instruction (FUN 140).
• If an interrupt factor is occurred during the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt is kept waiting
and it will be executed just after the EI instruction is executed.
• The DI instruction can be used only in the main program.

Basic Hardware and Function

209

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 142

IRET

Interrupt return

Expression
−−[ IRET ]−

Function
This instruction indicates the end of an interrupt program. When program execution reaches this
instruction, it returns to the original location of the main program (or subroutine).

Execution condition
Input
-

Operation
Execution

Output
-

Operand
No operand is required.

Example

An interrupt program
(Timer interrupt,
I/O interrupt #1, #2, #3 or #4)

Note
• The IRET instruction can be used only in an interrupt program.
• There is no specific instruction which indicates the beginning of the interrupt program.

210

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 143

WDT

Watchdog timer reset

Expression
Input −[ WDT n ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, this instruction extend the scan time over detection time by 200 ms.
Normally, T1/T1S detects the scan time-over if a scan is not finished within 200 ms. This instruction
can be used to extend the detection time.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
OFF
ON

No execution
Execution

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D

Constant Index
I

J

K

n Extend time

1 - 100

Example

When R020 is ON, the scan time detection time is extended by 200 ms. The operand n has no
effect on the extended time. It is fixed as 200 ms.
Normal detection point
0

50

100

150

200

250

Extended point
300

(ms)

Extended by 200 ms
Scan

WDT instruction
execution

Note
• As for the upper T-series PLCs, the operand n specifies the extended time. However in the
T1/T1S, it is fixed as 200 ms regardless of the operand n.

Basic Hardware and Function

211

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 144

STIZ

Step sequence initialize

Expression
Input −[ STIZ (n) A ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, n devices starting with A are reset to OFF, and A is set to ON.
This instruction is used to initialize a series of step sequence. The step sequence is useful to
describe a sequential operation.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution at the rising edge of the input

Output
OFF
ON

Operand
Name
X

Y

n Size of step
sequence
A Start device

Device
R S T.

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D

Constant Index
I

J

K
1 - 64

√

Example

When R020 is changed from OFF to ON, R400 is set to ON and subsequent 9 devices (R401
to R409) are reset to OFF.
This instruction initializes a series of step sequence, 10 devices starting with R400.

R409

R408

R407

R406

R405

R404

R403

R402

R401

R400

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

10 devices starting with R400

Note
• The STIZ instruction is used together with STIN (FUN 145) and STOT (FUN 146) instructions to
configure the step sequence.
• The STIZ instruction is executed only when the input is changed from OFF to ON.

212

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 145

STIN

Step sequence input

Expression
Input −[ STIN A ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON and the device A is ON, the output is set to ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
When A is ON
When A is OFF

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

Operand
Name
X
A Step device

Y

Device
R S T.
√

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D

Constant Index
I

J

K

Example

The following sequential operation is performed.
When R020 is changed from OFF to ON, R400 is set to ON and subsequent 9 devices (R401
to R409) are reset to OFF.
When X004 comes ON, R400 is reset to OFF and R401 is set to ON.
When both X005 and R022 are ON, R401 is reset to OFF and R402 is set to ON.
R020
X004
X005
R022
R400
R401
R402

Basic Hardware and Function

213

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 146

STOT

Step sequence output

Expression
Input −[ STOT A ]−

Function
When the input is ON, the device A is set to ON and the devices of STIN instructions on the same
rung are reset to OFF.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
-

No execution
Execution

Operand
Name
X
A Step device

Y

Device
R S T.
√

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D

Constant Index
I

J

K

Example
See example on STIN (FUN 145) instruction.

Note
• The STIZ, STIN and STOT instructions are used together to configure the step sequence.
• Two or more STOT instructions can be placed on one rung to perform simultaneous sequences.

• Two or more STIN instructions can be placed on one rung in parallel or in series to perform loop
or convergence of sequences. (Max. 11 STIN instructions on one rung)

• To perform the conditional branch (sequence selection), separate the rungs as follows.
This limitation is applied to T1 version 1.00 only.
[ STIN A ]

||

[ STOT B ]

[ STIN A ]

||

[ STOT B ]

||

[ STOT C ]

[ STIN A ]

||

[ STOT C ]

Not allowed

214

T1-16S User’s Manual

Available

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 147

F/F

Flip-flop

Expression
−S

Set input

Reset input − R

F/F

Q

− Output

A

Function
When the set input is ON, the device A is set to ON. When the reset input is ON, the device A is
reset to OFF. When both the set and reset inputs are OFF, the device A remains the state. If both
the set and reset inputs are ON, the device A is reset to OFF.
The state of the output is the same as the device A.

Execution condition
Set
input
OFF

Reset
input
OFF
ON
OFF
ON

ON

Operation
No execution (A remains previous state)
Resets A to OFF
Sets A to ON
Resets A to OFF

Output
Same
as A

Operand
Name
X
A Device

Y
√

Device
R S T.
√ √

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D

Constant Index
I

J

K

Example

When X003 is ON, R10E is set to ON. When X004 is ON, R10E is reset to OFF. If both are
ON, R10E is reset to OFF.
An example timing diagram is shown below.
X003
X004
R10E

Note
• For the set input, direct linking to a connecting point is not allowed. In this case, insert a dummy
contact (always ON = S04F, etc.) just before the input. Refer to Note of Shift register FUN 074.

Basic Hardware and Function

215

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 149

U/D

Up-down counter

Expression
Direction input − U U/D
Count input
−C
Enable input
−E A

Q

− Output

Function
While the enable input is ON, this instruction counts the number of the count input changes from
OFF to ON. The count direction (up count or down count) is selected by the state of the direction
input. The count value is stored in the counter register A. The count value range is 0 to 65535.
• Up count when the direction input is ON
• Down count when the direction input is OFF
When the enable input is OFF, the counter register A is cleared to 0.

Execution condition
Enable
Operation
input
OFF No operation (A is cleared to 0)
ON
Count value is not limit value (0 or 65535)
Count value is limit value and count input is ON

Output
OFF
OFF
ON

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√

A Count value

Constant Index
I

J

K

Example

Note

X005
X006
R010
C005

3
1 2

2

1

C.005

216

T1-16S User’s Manual

1

2 3

• The transitional contact is required for
the count input. Otherwise, counting is
executed every scan during X005 is ON
in this example.
• For the direction input and the count
input, direct linking to a connecting point
is not allowed. Refer to Note of Shift
register FUN 074.

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 154

CLND

Set calendar

Expression
Input −[ A CLND ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the built-in clock/calendar is set to the date and time specified by 6 registers
starting with A. If an invalid data is contained in the registers, the operation is not executed and the
output is turned ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No operation
Execution (data is valid))
No execution (data is not valid)

Output
OFF
OFF
ON

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √

A Start of table

Constant Index
I

J

K

Example

When R020 is ON, the clock/calendar is set according to the data of D0050 to D0055, and the
output is OFF (R0031 is OFF).
If D0050 to D0055 contains invalid data, the setting operation is not executed and the output is
turned ON (R0031 comes ON).
F

D0050
D0051
D0052
D0053
D0054
D0055

8 7

H00
H00
H00
H00
H00
H00

0

Year
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
Second

Allowable data range (2-digit BCD)
H00 to H99 (1990 - 2089)
H01 to H12
H01 to H31
H00 to H23
H00 to H59
H00 to H59

Calendar
LSI

Note
• The day of the week is automatically.

Basic Hardware and Function

217

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 155

CLDS

Calendar operation

Expression
Input −[ A CLDS B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, this instruction subtracts the date and time stored in 6 registers starting with
A from the current date and time, and stores the result in 6 registers starting with B.
If an invalid data is contained in the registers, the operation is not executed and the output is
turned ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No operation
Execution (data is valid))
No execution (data is not valid)

Output
OFF
OFF
ON

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Subtrahend
B Result

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index
I

J

K

Example

When R020 is ON, the date and time data recorded in D0050 to D0055 are subtracted from
the current date and time of clock/calendar, and the result is stored in D0100 to D0105.
In normal operation, the output is OFF (R0035 is OFF). If D0050 to D0055 contains invalid
data, the operation is not executed and the output is turned ON (R0035 comes ON).
Current date & time
H0098
H0001
H0015
H0017
H0000
H0000

F

minus

D0050
D0051
D0052
D0053
D0054
D0055

0

H0097
H0010
H0010
H0015
H0030
H0000

F

D0100
D0101
D0102
D0103
D0104
D0105

0

H0000
H0003
H0007
H0001
H0030
H0000

Note
• Future date and time cannot be used as subtrahend A.
• In the calculation result, it means that 1 year is 365 days and 1 month is 30 days.

218

T1-16S User’s Manual

(Year)
(Month)
(Day)
(Hour)
(Minute)
(Second)

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 156

PID3

Pre-derivative real PID

Expression
Input −[ A PID3 B → C ]− Output

Function
Performs PID (Proportional, Integral, Derivative) control which is a fundamental method of feedback control. (Pre-derivative real PID algorithm) This PID3 instruction has the following features.
• For derivative action, incomplete derivative is used to suppress interference of high-frequency
noise and to expand the stable application range,
• Controllability and stability are enhanced in case of limit operation for MV, by using digital PID
algorithm succeeding to benefits of analog PID.
• Auto, cascade and manual modes are supported in this instruction.
• Digital filter is available for PV.
• Direct / reverse operation is selectable.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
Initialization
Execute PID every setting interval

Output
OFF
ON when
execution

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S

T.

A Top of input data
B Top of parameter
C Top of output data

A
A+1
A+2
A+3
A+4
A+5

Input data
Process input value
A-mode set value
C-mode set value
M-mode MV input
MV tracking input
Mode setting

PVC
ASV
CSV
MMV
TMV
MODE

A-mode: Auto mode
C-mode: Cascade mode
M-mode: Manual mode

B
B+1
B+2
B+3
B+4
B+5
B+6
B+7
B+8
B+9
B+10
B+11
B+12

C. XW YW RW
√ √ √
√ √ √
√ √

SW
√
√
√

Register
T C
√ √
√ √
√ √

Control parameter
KP
Proportional gain
TI
Integral time
TD
Derivative time
GP
Dead-band
ISV
A-mode initial SV
FT
Input filter constant
ASV differential limit DSV
MMV differential limit DMMV
STS
Initial status
MH
MV upper limit
ML
MV lower limit
DMV
MV differential limit
n
Control interval setting

Constant Index
D
√
√
√

C
C+1
C+2
C+3
C+4
C+5
C+6
C+7
C+8
C+9

I

J

K

Output data
Manipulation value
Last error
Last derivative value
Last PV
Last SV
Integral remainder
Derivative remainder
Internal MV
Internal counter
Control interval

Basic Hardware and Function

MV
en-1
Dn-1
PVn-1
SVn-1
Ir
Dr
MVn
C
∆t

219

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
Control block diagram
Integral
control

Integral
1
TI⋅s

Auto
mode

ASV
DSV

∆In
MVn

Proportional

Differential

SVn

CSV

+

Gap

en

∆Pn

1

+
+

KP

∆MVn

MVS

H/L

DMV

MVCn
MV

-

-

Derivative

Cascade
mode
PVn

MMV

∆Dn

TD⋅s
1+η⋅TD⋅s

DMMV

Differential limit

(η = 0.1)

PVC

1

1+T⋅s
Digtal filter

Manual
mode

MVS: Velocity → Position
MVn = MVn-1 ± ∆MVn
H/L: Upper / lower limit
DMV: Differential limit

Integral action control:
When MV is limited (H/L, DMV) and the integral value has same sign as limit over, integral action
is stopped.
Velocity → Position conversion:
In Direct mode, MV increases when PV is increased.
In Reverse mode, MV decreases when PV is increased.
Gap (dead-band) operation:
Error e

SV - PV
GP (%) GP (%)

Algorithm
Digital filter:
PVn = (1 − FT ) ⋅ PVC + FT ⋅ PVn − 1

Here,

220

0.000 ≤ FT ≤ 0.999

T1-16S User’s Manual

→ MVn = MVn-1 - ∆Mv n
→ MVn = MVn-1 + ∆MVn

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
PID algorithm:
∆MVn = KP ⋅ ( ∆Pn + ∆In + ∆Dn)
MVn = MVn − 1 ± ∆MVn
Here,

∆Pn = en − en − 1
en = SVn − PVn
∆In =

en ⋅ ∆t + Ir
TI

(If GP ≠ 0, Gap is applied)
(If TI = 0, then ∆In = 0)

TD ⋅ (PVn − 1 − PVn ) − ∆t ⋅ Dn − 1 + Dr
∆t + η ⋅ TD
Dn = Dn − 1 + ∆Dn
η = 0.1 (Fixed)
∆Dn =

Parameter details
A
A+1
A+2
A+3
A+4
A+5

Process input value PVC (0.00 to 100.00 %)
Auto mode set value ASV (0.00 to 100.00 %)
Cascade mode set value CSV (0.00 to 100.00 %)
Manual mode MV MMV (-25.00 to 125.00 %)
MV tracking input TMV (-25.00 to 125.00 %)
Mode setting MODE
F

C

8

4

Data range:
Data range:
Data range:
Data range:
Data range:

0 to 10000
0 to 10000
0 to 10000
-2500 to 12500
-2500 to 12500

0

Operation mode
00 : Manual mode
01 : Auto mode
10 : Cascade mode
11 : (Reserve)
Tracking designation
0 : No
1 : Yes
B
B+1
B+2
B+3
B+4
B+5
B+6
B+7

Proportional gain KP (0.00 to 327.67)
Integral time TI (0.000 to 32.767 min., ∆In=0 if TI =0)
Derivative time T D (0.000 to 32.767 min.)
Gap (dead-band) GP (0.00 to 10.00 %)
Auto mode initial set value ISV (0.00 to 100.00 %)
Input filter constant FT (0.000 to 0.999)
ASV differential limit DSV (0.00 to 100.00 %/∆t)
MMV differential limit DMMV (0.00 to 100.00 %/∆t)

Data range:
Data range:
Data range:
Data range:
Data range:
Data range:
Data range:
Data range:

0 to 32767
0 to 32767
0 to 32767
0 to 1000
0 to 10000
0 to 999
0 to 10000
0 to 10000

Basic Hardware and Function

221

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
B+8

Initial status STS
F

C

8

4

0

Initial operation mode
00 : Manual mode
01 : Auto mode
10 : Cascade mode
11 : (Reserve)
Direct / reverse selection
0 : Direct
1 : Reverse
B+9
B+10
B+11
B+12

MV upper limit MH (-25.00 to 125.00 %)
Data range: -2500 to 12500
MV lower limit ML (-25.00 to 125.00 %)
Data range: -2500 to 12500
MV differential limit DMV (0.00 to 100.00 %/∆t)
Data range: 0 to 10000
Control interval setting n (1 to 32767 times)
Data range: 1 to 32767
Executes PID every n scan. Therefore, control interval ∆t = n × constant scan interval
(It is treated as n = 1 when n ≤ 0)

C
C+1
:
C+9

Manipulation value MV (-25.00 to 125.00 %)

Data range: -2500 to 12500

Internal work area

Operation
1. When the instruction input is OFF:
Initializes the PID3 instruction.
Operation mode is set as specified by B+8.
Auto mode SV is set as specified by B+4.
Manual mode MV is set as current MV.
Internal calculation data is initialized.
MV remains unchanged.

A+5 bit 0, 1 ← B+8 bit 0, 1
ASV ← ISV
MMV ← MV

2. When the instruction input is ON:
Executes PID calculation every n scan which is specified by B+12. The following operation modes are
available according to the setting of A+5.
• Auto mode
This is a normal PID control mode with ASV as set value.
Set value differential limit DSV, manipulation value upper/lower limit MH/ML and differential limit DMV
are effective.
Bump-less changing from auto mode to manual mode is available. (Manual mode manipulation value
MMV is over-written by current MV automatically. MMV ← MV)

222

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
• Manual mode
In this mode, the manipulation value MV can be directly controlled by the input value of MMV.
MV differential limit for manual mode DMMV is effective. MH/ML and DMV are not effective.
When mode is changed from manual to auto or cascade, the operation is started from the current MV.
• Cascade mode
This is a mode for PID cascade connection. PID is executed with CSV as set value.
Different from the auto mode, set value differential limit is not effective. Manipulation value upper/lower
limit MH/ML and differential limit DMV are effective.
Bump-less changing from cascade mode to manual mode is available. (Manual mode manipulation
value MMV is over-written by current MV automatically. MMV ← MV)
And, bump-less changing from cascade mode to auto mode is available. (Auto mode set value ASV is
over-written by current CSV automatically. ASV ← CSV)
• MV tracking
This function is available in auto and cascade modes. When the tracking designation ( A+5 bit 2) is ON,
tracking input TMV is directly output as MV.
Manipulation value upper/lower limit MH/ML is effective, but differential limit DMV is not effective.
When the tracking designation is changed to OFF, the operation is started from the current MV.

Note
• PID3 instruction is only usable on the main-program.
• PID3 instruction must be used under the constant scan mode. The constant scan interval can be selected
in the range of 10 to 200 ms, 10 ms increments.
• The data handled by the PID3 instruction are % units. Therefore, process input value PVC, manipulation
value MV, etc., should be converted to % units (scaling), before and/or after the PID3 instruction. For this
purpose, the function generator instruction (FUN165 FG) is convenient.

Basic Hardware and Function

223

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 160

UL

Upper limit

Expression
Input −[ A UL B → C ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the following operation is executed. (Upper limit for A by B)
If A ≤ B, then C = A.
If A > B, then C = B.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No operation
Execution: not limited (A ≤ B)
Execution: limited (A > B)

Output
OFF
OFF
ON

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Operation data
B Upper limit
C Destination

C. XW YW RW
√ √ √
√ √ √
√ √

SW
√
√
√

Register
T C
√ √
√ √
√ √

Constant Index
D
√
√
√

I
√
√
√

J
√
√
√

K
√
√
√

√
√

√
√
√

Example

When R030 is ON, the upper limit operation is executed for the data of RW018 by the data of
D1200, and the result is stored in RW021.
C
(RW021)

Upper limit B (D1200)

A (RW018)

When RW018 is 3000 and D1200 is 4000, 3000 is stored in RW021 and R0040 is OFF.
When RW018 is 4500 and D1200 is 4000, the limit value 4000 is stored in RW021 and R0040
is ON.

Note
• This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

224

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 161

LL

Lower limit

Expression
Input −[ A LL B → C ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, the following operation is executed. (Lower limit for A by B)
If A ≥ B, then C = A.
If A < B, then C = B.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No operation
Execution: not limited (A ≥ B)
Execution: limited (A < B)

Output
OFF
OFF
ON

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Operation data
B Lower limit
C Destination

C. XW YW RW
√ √ √
√ √ √
√ √

SW
√
√
√

Register
T C
√ √
√ √
√ √

Constant Index
D
√
√
√

I
√
√
√

J
√
√
√

K
√
√
√

√
√

√
√
√

Example

When R031 is ON, the lower limit operation is executed for the data of RW019 by the data of
D1220, and the result is stored in RW022.
C
(RW022)

A (RW019)
Lower limit B (D1220)
When RW019 is -1000 and D1220 is -1800, -1000 is stored in RW022 and R0041 is OFF.
When RW019 is 800 and D1220 is 1200, the limit value 1200 is stored in RW022 and R0041
is ON.

Note
• This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).
Basic Hardware and Function

225

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 162

MAX

Maximum value

Expression
Input −[ A MAX (n) B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, this instruction searches for the maximum value from the table of sizen
words starting with A, and stores the maximum value in B and the pointer indicating the position of
the maximum value in B+1. The allowable range of the table size n is 1 to 64.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
OFF
ON

No execution
Execution

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Start of table
n Table size
B Result

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index
I

J

K
1 - 64

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

Example

When R010 is ON, the maximum value is found from the register table D0200 to D0209 (10
words), and the maximum value is stored in D0500 and the pointer is stored in D0501.
D0200
D0201
D0202
D0203
D0204
D0205
D0206
D0207
D0208
D0209

100
10000
-1000
10
0
200
-300
20000
-30
20

Pointer
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

D0500
D0501

20000
7

(Maximum value)
(Pointer)

Note
• This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).
• If there are two or more maximum value in the table, the lowest pointer is stored.
• If Index register K is used as operand B, the pointer data is discarded.

226

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 163

MIN

Minimum value

Expression
Input −[ A MIN (n) B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, this instruction searches for the minimum value from the table of sizen
words starting with A, and stores the minimum value in B and the pointer indicating the position of
the minimum value in B+1. The allowable range of the table size n is 1 to 64.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
OFF
ON

No execution
Execution

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Start of table
n Table size
B Result

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index
I

J

K
1 - 64

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

Example

When R011 is ON, the minimum value is found from the register table D0200 to D0209 (10
words), and the minimum value is stored in D0510 and the pointer is stored in D0511.
D0200
D0201
D0202
D0203
D0204
D0205
D0206
D0207
D0208
D0209

100
10000
-1000
10
0
200
-300
20000
-30
20

Pointer
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

D0510
D0511

-1000
2

(Minimum value)
(Pointer)

Note
• This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).
• If there are two or more minimum value in the table, the lowest pointer is stored.
• If Index register K is used as operand B, the pointer data is discarded.
Basic Hardware and Function

227

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 164

AVE

Average value

Expression
Input −[ A AVE (n) B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, this instruction calculates the average value of the data stored in the n
registers starting with A, and stores the average value in B. The allowable range of the table size n
is 1 to 64.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
OFF
ON

No execution
Execution

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Start of table
n Table size
B Result

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index
I

J

K
1 - 64

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

Example

When R012 is ON, the average value of the data stored in the register table D0200 to D0209
(10 words), and the average value is stored in D0520.
D0200
D0201
D0202
D0203
D0204
D0205
D0206
D0207
D0208
D0209

228

100
10000
-1000
10
0
200
-300
20000
-30
20

T1-16S User’s Manual

D0520

2900

(Average value)

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 165

FG

Function generator

Expression
Input −[ A FG (n) B → C ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, this instruction finds the function value f(x) for A as x, and stores it in C. The
function f(x) is defined by the parameters stored in 2 × n registers starting with B.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
OFF
ON

No execution
Execution

Operand
Name
X
A Input value x
n Parameter size
B Start of
parameters
C Function value
f(x)

Y

Device
R S T.

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

√

√

√

√
1 - 32

Example

When R010 is ON, the FG instruction finds the function value f(x) for x = XW004, and stores
the result in D0100.
The function f(x) is defined by 2 × 4 = 8 parameters stored in D0600 to D0607. In this example,
these parameters are set at the first scan.

Basic Hardware and Function

229

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
Parameter table
4 registers for x parameters and subsequent 4 registers for corresponding f(x) parameters
y
D0600
D0601
D0602
D0603
D0604
D0605
D0606
D0607

-2000
-100
100
2000
-1800
-300
300
1800

y = f(x)

x1
x2
x3
x4
y1
y2
y3
y4

300
-2000

(x4,y4)

1800

(x3,y3)

-100
(x2,y2)

100
-300

2000

x

-1800

(x1,y1)

The FG instruction interpolators f(x) value for x based on the n parameters of (xi,yi).
For example, if XW04 is 1500 (x = 1500), the result 1405 (f(x) = 1405) is stored in D0100.
y
1800
1405
300
-2000

-100
100
-300

2000
1500

x

-1800

Note
• The order of the x parameters should be x1 ≤ x2 ≤ ... ≤ xi ≤ ... ≤ xn. In the above example, the
data of D0600 to D0603 should be D0600 ≤ D0601 ≤ D0602 ≤ D0603.
• If x is smaller than x1, y1 is given as f(x). In this example, D0604 data (-1800) is stored in
D0100 if XW04 is smaller than D0600 (-2000).
• If x is greater than xn, yn is given as f(x). In this example, D0607 data (1800) is stored in
D0100 if XW04 is greater than D0603 (2000).
• The valid data range is -32768 to 32767.

230

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 180

ABS

Absolute value

Expression
Input −[ A ABS B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, this instruction finds the absolute value of operand A, and stores it in B.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
OFF
ON

No execution
Execution

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Source
B Destination

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index
I
√
√

J
√
√

K
√
√

√

Example

When X006 is ON, the absolute value of RW38 is stored in D0121.
For example, if RW38 is -12000, the absolute value 12000 is stored in D0121.
D0121
32767

12000

-32767

-12000 0

32767

RW38

Note
• The data range of A is -32768 to 32767. If the data of A is -32768, 32767 is stored in B.

Basic Hardware and Function

231

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 182

NEG

2’s complement

Expression
Input −[ A NEG B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, this instruction finds the 2’s complement value of A, and stores it in B.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
OFF
ON

No execution
Execution

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√ √ √ √ √ √

A Source
B Destination

Constant Index
I
√
√

J
√
√

K
√
√

√

Example

When X007 is ON, the 2’s complement value (sign inverted data) of RW39 is stored in D0122.
For example, if RW38 is 4660, the 2’s complement value -4660 is stored in D0122.
2’s complement data is calculated as follows.
F

RW39

E

D

C

B

A

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

(4660)

Bit inverse
1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1

(-4661)

+1
D0122

1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0

(-4660)

Note
• The data range of A is -32768 to 32767. If the data of A is -32768, the same data -32768 is
stored in B.

232

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 183

DNEG

Double-word 2’s complement

Expression
Input −[ A+1⋅A DNEG B+1⋅B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, this instruction finds the 2’s complement value of double-word data A+1⋅A,
and stores it in B+1⋅B.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Execution

Output
OFF
ON

Operand
Name
X
A Source
B Destination

Y

Device
R S T.

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index
I

J

K
√

Example

When X007 is ON, the 2’s complement value (sign inverted data) of double-word register
RW41⋅RW40 is stored in double-word register D0151⋅D0150.
For example, if RW41⋅RW40 is -1234567890, the 2’s complement value 1234567890 is stored
in D0151⋅D0150.

Note
• The data range of A+1⋅A is -2147483648 to 2147483647. If the data of A+1⋅A is -2147483648,
the same data -2147483648 is stored in B+1⋅B.

Basic Hardware and Function

233

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 185

7SEG

7 segment decode

Expression
Input −[ A 7SEG B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, this instruction converts the lower 4 bits data of A into the 7 segment code,
and stores it in B. The 7 segment code is normally used for a numeric display LED.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
OFF
ON

No execution
Execution

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Source
B Destination

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index
I
√
√

J
√
√

K
√
√

√

Example

When X000 is ON, the lower 4 bits data of RW15 is converted into the 7 segment code, and
the result is stored in lower 8 bits of RW10. 0 is stored in upper 8 bits of RW10.
For example, if RW15 is H0009, the corresponding 7 segment code H006F is stored in RW10.
F

RW15

E

D

C

B

A

9

8

7

Upper 12 bits are ignored

RW10

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1

(H0009)

7 segment decode

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1

(H006F)

0 is stored in upper 8 bits

The 7 segment code conversion table is shown on the next page.

234

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

Operand A (lower 4 bits)
Hex
Binary
0
0000
1
0001
2
0010
3
0011
4
0100
5
0101
6
0110
7
0111
8
1000
9
1001
A
1010
B
1011
C
1100
D
1101
E
1110
F
1111

7 segment LED
composition

B0
B5
B6
B4

B1

B2
B3

Operand B (lower 8 bits)
B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1

Display

Basic Hardware and Function

235

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 186

ASC

ASCII conversion

Expression
Input −[ A ASC B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, this instruction converts the alphanumeric characters into the ASCII codes,
and stores them in the register table starting with B. (16 characters maximum)

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
OFF
ON

No execution
Execution

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Characters
B Start of
destination

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√

√

√

√

√

√

Constant Index
I

J

K
√

Example

When R030 is ON, the characters ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMN’ is converted into the ASCII codes, and
the result is stored in 8 registers starting with lower 8 bits (byte) of D0200 (D0200 to D0207).
High
F

D0200
D0201
D0202
D0203
D0204
D0205
D0206
D0207

H42 (B)
H44 (D)
H46 (F)
H48 (H)
H4A (J)
H4C (L)
H4E (N)

Low
8 7

0

H41 (A)
H43 (C)
H45 (E)
H47 (G)
H49 (I)
H4B (K)
H4D (M)
Previous data is remained

Note
• Only the number of bytes converted are stored. The rest are not changed. In the above
example, 14 characters are converted into 14 bytes of ASCII code, and these ASCII codes are
stored in 7 registers (D0200 to D0206). The data of D0207 remains unchanged.

236

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 188

BIN

Binary conversion

Expression
Input −[ A BIN B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, this instruction converts the 4 digits of BCD data of A into binary, and stores
in B. If any digit of A contains non-BCD code (other than H0 through H9), the conversion is not
executed and the instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

No execution
Normal execution
BCD data error

ERF
−
−
Set

Operand
Name
X
A Source (BCD)

Y

Device
R S T.

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√

B Destination
(Binary)

√

√

√

√

√

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

√

√

√

H0000 H9999

Example

When R017 is ON, the BCD data of RW28 is converted into binary data, and the result is
stored in D0127.
For example, if RW28 is H1234, the binary data 1234 is stored in D0127.

RW28
H1234

BCD to Binary

D0127
1234

Note
• If any digit of operand A contains non-BCD data, e.g. H13A6, the conversion is not executed
and the instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON.

Basic Hardware and Function

237

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 190

BCD

BCD conversion

Expression
Input −[ A BCD B ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, this instruction converts the binary data of A into BCD, and stores in B. If the
data of A is not in the range of 0 to 9999, the conversion is not executed and the instruction error
flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
OFF
ON
OFF

No execution
Normal execution
Binary data error

ERF
−
−
Set

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Source
(Binary)
B Destination
(BCD)

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√

√

√

√

√

√

Constant Index
I
√

J
√

K
√

√

√

√

0 - 9999

Example

When R019 is ON, the data of D0211 is converted into 4-digit BCD, and the result is stored in
RW22.
For example, if D0211 is 5432, the BCD data H5432 is stored in RW22.

D0211
5432

Binary to BCD

RW22
H5432

Note
• If the data of A is smaller than 0 or greater than 9999, the conversion is not executed and the
instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON.

238

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 235

I/O

Direct I/O

Expression
Input −[ I/O (n) A ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, this instruction immediately updates the external input (XW) and output
(YW) registers which are in the range of n registers starting with A.
• For XW register ... reads the data from corresponding input circuit
• For YW register ... writes the data into corresponding output circuit

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation

Output
OFF
ON

No execution
Execution

Operand
Name
X
n Register size
A Start of
registers

Y

Device
R S T.

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D

Constant Index
I

J

K
1 - 32

√

√

Example

When R010 is ON, the 4 registers starting with XW00 (XW00 to YW03) are updated
immediately.
XW00
XW01
YW02
YW03

Input
circuit
Output
circuit

Basic Hardware and Function

239

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
Note
• In the T1-16S, the following register/device range is only effective for this Direct I/O instruction.
Input on basic unit
X000 - X007

Output on basic unit
Y020 - Y027

I/O module
Not effective

• The Direct I/O instruction can be programmed in the main program and in the interrupt program.
If this instruction is programmed in both, the instruction in the main program should be executed
in interrupt disable state. Refer to EI (FUN 140) and DI (FUN 141) instructions.

240

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 236

XFER

Expanded data transfer

Expression
Input −[ A XFER B → C ]− Output

Function
When the input is ON, data block transfer is performed between the source which is indirectly
designated by A and A+1 and the destination which is indirectly designated by C and C+1. The
transfer size (number of words) is designated by B.
The transfer size is 1 to 256 words. (except for writing into EEPROM)
Data transfer between the following objects are available.
• CPU register (RW or D) ↔ EEPROM (D register)
• CPU register (RW or D) ↔ T1S RS-485 port (T1S only)

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Normal execution
When error is occurred (see Note)

Output
OFF
ON
ON

ERF
−
−
Set

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Source
parameter
B Transfer size
C Destination
parameter

Register
C. XW YW RW SW T C D
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
√

√
√

√
√

√
√

√
√

√
√

Constant Index
I

J

K

√
√

Parameters
A
A+1

Source parameter
Type
Leading address

Register type
RW register (RAM)
D register (RAM)
D register (EEPROM)
T1S RS-485 port

B
B+1
B+2

Transfer size and status
Transfer size
Status flag for RS-485 port
(max. 2 words)

C
C+1

Type code
H0003
H0004
H0020

Leading address
0 to 255
0 to 4095
0 to 2047

H0030

0 (fixed)

Destination parameter
Type
Leading address

Transfer size
1 to 256
1 to 256
1 to 32 (if destination)
1 to 256 (if source)
1 to 256

Basic Hardware and Function

241

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
CPU register ↔ built-in EEPROM
In the EEPROM, the D registers are divided into pages as follows.
T1-16S
D0000
Page 1
(32 words)
D0031
D0032
Page 2
(32 words)
D0063

D2016

• Writing data into the EEPROM is
available within one page at a
time. (max. 32 words)
• For data reading from the
EEPROM, there is no need to
consider the pages.

Page 64
(32 words)

D2047

Example

When R020 is changed from OFF to ON, 10 words of RAM data (D0700 to D0709) are written
into the EEPROM (D0016 to D0025).
D1000 (H0004) and D1001 (700) indicate the leading register of the source table (D0700 in
RAM). D1002 (10) indicates the transfer size (10 words = 10 registers). D1003 (H0020 = 32)
and D1004 (16) indicate the leading register of the destination table (D0016 in EEPROM).

Note
• The XFER instruction is not executed as error in the following cases. In these cases, the
instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON. If the ERF is set to ON once, it remains ON until
resetting to OFF by user program.
(1) When the number of words transferred exceeds limit.
(2) When the source/destination table of transfer is out of the valid range.
(3) When the transfer combination is invalid.
• The EEPROM has a life limit for data writing into an address. It is 100,000 times. Pay attention
not to exceed the limit. (EEPROM alarm flag = S007 is not updated by this instruction)
• Once data writing into the EEPROM is executed, EEPROM access (read/write) is prohibited for
the duration of 10 ms. Therefore, minimum 10 ms interval is necessary for data writing.
• The XFER instruction can be programmed in the main program and in the interrupt program.
If this instruction is programmed in both, the instruction in the main program should be executed
in interrupt disable state. Refer to EI (FUN 140) and DI (FUN 141) instructions.

242

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
CPU register ↔ T1S RS-485 port

When the instruction input is ON, one set of message (from start character to the trailing code)
which is received by the RS-485 port is read from the receive buffer, and stored in the CPU
registers. The transfer size is fixed to 256 words. The execution status and the message length
(in bytes) are stored in the status flag.
The instruction input must be kept ON until the receiving operation is complete.

Example

D0000
D0001

Source designation
H0030
00000

D0002
D0003
D0004

Transfer size
00256 (fixed)
Execution status
Message length

T1S RS-485 port

D0005
D0006

Destination designation
H0004
00100
D0100 (CPU register)

When R0000 is ON, one set of received message is read and stored in D0100 and after.
Execution status:

H0000 ... Normal complete
H0001 ... Communication error (parity error, framing error)
H0002 ... Message length over (more than 512 bytes)
H0003 ... Receive buffer over flow
H0004 ... Receive time-out (from start character to the trailing code)
Baudrate
300, 600, 1200 bps
2400 bps
4800 bps
9600 bps
19200 bps

Time-out setting
30 seconds
15 seconds
7 seconds
3 seconds
1.5 seconds

Message length: 0 .............. No receive message
1 to 512 ... Message length in bytes

Note
• The XFER instruction is not executed as error in the following cases. In these cases, the
instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON. If the ERF is set to ON once, it remains ON until
resetting to OFF by user program.
(1) The leading address for the RS-485 port designation is other than 0.
(2) Transfer size is other than 256.
(3) Mode setting of the RS-485 port is not the free ASCII mode.
(4) This instruction is programmed in the sub-program #1.

Basic Hardware and Function

243

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

When the instruction input is ON, one set of message which is stored in the source table (from
start character to the trailing code) is transmitted through the RS-485 port. The execution
status is stored in the status flag.
The instruction input must be kept ON until the transmitting operation is complete.

Example

D0010
D0011

Source designation
H00
H04
00500

D0012
D0013

Transfer size
00012
Execution status

D0500 (CPU register)

D0015
D0016

Destination designation
H00
H30
00000
T1S RS-485 port

When R0001 is ON, one set of message (ended by the trailing code) stored in the range of
D0500 to D0511 (12 words) is transmitted through the RS-485 port.
Execution status:

H0000 ... Normal complete
H0001 ... During transmitting the message
H0002 ... Communication busy
H0003 ... During the reset operation
H0004 ... Send time-out (from start character to the trailing code)
H0005 ... Send message length error (no trailing code in the source table)
Baudrate
300, 600, 1200 bps
2400 bps
4800 bps
9600 bps
19200 bps

Time-out setting
30 seconds
15 seconds
7 seconds
3 seconds
1.5 seconds

Note
• The XFER instruction is not executed as error in the following cases. In these cases, the
instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON. If the ERF is set to ON once, it remains ON until
resetting to OFF by user program.
(1) The leading address for the RS-485 port designation is other than 0.
(2) Transfer size is out of the range of 1 to 256.
(3) Mode setting of the RS-485 port is not the free ASCII mode.
(4) This instruction is programmed in the sub-program #1.

244

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
FUN 236

XFER

Expanded data transfer (Inverter connection mode)

Expression
Input −[ A XFER B → C ]− Output

Function
This function is provided to control Toshiba Inverters VF-A7/G7/S9 connected on the RS-485 line.
When the RS-485 port operation mode is set to the Inverter mode (SW56 = 3), the T1-16S can
perform the following functions for up to 63 Inverters.
(1) Cyclically scans the Inverters and sends/receives the following data to/from each Inverter.
• Send to Inverter: Frequency reference write and Operation command write (Run, Stop, etc.)
• Receive from Inverter: Operating frequency monitor and Output terminal status monitor
(2) Cyclically scans the Inverters and receives the following data from each Inverter.
• Receive from Inverter: Operating frequency monitor and Output terminal status monitor
(3) Sends a specified Read command to a specified Inverter and stores the response data.
(4) Sends a specified Write command with the command data to a specified Inverter.
(5) Sends a specified Write command with the command data to all the connected inverters as
broadcast.

Execution condition
Input
OFF
ON

Operation
No execution
Normal execution
When error is occurred (see Note)

Output
OFF
ON
ON

ERF
−
−
Set

Operand
Name
X

Y

Device
R S T.

A Data table
B Inverter No.
C RS-485 port

C. XW YW RW
√ √ √
√ √ √
√ √

SW
√
√
√

Register
T C
√ √
√ √
√ √

Constant Index
D
√
√
√

I

J

K

Parameters
A
A+1

Data table designation
Register type code
Leading address

B
B+1
B+2
B+3
B+4
B+5
B+6
B+7

Parameter and status
Inverter number
Operation mode
Execution status
Communication error code
Inverter communication
status map
(each bit shows each
Inverter status)

C
C+1

RS-485 port designation
Fixed to H0030
Fixed to 0

Data table designation (A, A+1):
Register
RW register
D register

Type code (A)
H0003
H0004

Leading address (A+1)
0 to 255
0 to 4095

Basic Hardware and Function

245

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
Operation mode designation (B+1):
B+1
0
1
2
3
4

Operation mode
Data exchange mode
(Mode 0)
Monitor mode
(Mode 1)
Read command mode
(Mode 2)
Write command mode
(Mode 3)
Broadcast mode
(Mode 4)

Description
Cyclically scans the connected Inverters (Control & Monitor)
(Inverter command: P+FA01&FA00 and R+FD00&FE07)
Cyclically scans the connected Inverters (Monitor only)
(Inverter command: R+FD00&FE07)
Sends a read command to a specified Inverter
(Inverter command: R+ User designation)
Sends a write command to a specified Inverter
(Inverter command: P+ User designation)
Sends a write command to all the connected Inverters as broadcast
(Inverter command: P+ User designation)

Inverter number (B):
For the operation mode 0 and 1:
It specifies the maximum Inverter number. For example, if it is 5, the T1-16S scans from #0
through #5 Inverters and repeats. Setting range is 0 to 63.
For the operation mode 2 and 3:
It specifies the target Inverter number for sending commands. Setting range is 0 to 63.
For the operation mode 4:
This setting is ignored. The broadcast address (HFF) is used as Inverter number.
Execution status (B+2):
F

E

D

C

B

A

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

B+2

Shows the scan count.
(0 → 1 → 2 → ... → 32767 → 0 → 1 ... )
Comes 1 when the RS-485 port is busy. (No execution)

Communication error code (B+3):
The communication error code responded from the Inverter is shown here. If 2 or more Inverters are error,
the smallest Inverter number's error is stored. Refer to Inverter's manual for the error code.
B+3
0

Meaning
No error (Normal)
Response time-out (No answer)
Inverter error response (Refer to Inverter's manual)

Others

Inverter communication status map (B+4 to B+7):
This 4-word table shows the communication status map of each Inverter. (1: Normal / 0: Error or No
answer)
B+4
B+5
B+6
B+7

246

F

E

D

C

B

A

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

15
31
47
63

14
30
46
62

13
29
45
61

12
28
44
60

11
27
43
59

10
26
42
58

9
25
41
57

8
24
40
56

7
23
39
55

6
22
38
54

5
21
37
53

4
20
36
52

3
19
35
51

2
18
34
50

1
17
33
49

0
16
32
48

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
< Data exchange mode (Mode 0) >
When the instruction input comes ON with the operand B+1 is 0, the Data exchange mode
(mode 0) is selected. In this mode, the T1-16S sends the following commands to the Inverters
starting from #0 through the Inverter number specified by the operand B, and repeats.

Scan

#0
#0
#1
#1
:
#n
#n

Frequency reference write (FA01)
Operation command write (FA00)
Frequency reference write (FA01)
Operation command write (FA00)

#0
#0
#1
#1
:
#n
#n

Operating frequency monitor (FD00)
Output terminal status monitor (FE07)
Operating frequency monitor (FD00)
Output terminal status monitor (FE07)

Frequency reference write (FA01)
Operation command write (FA00)

Operating frequency monitor (FD00)
Output terminal status monitor (FE07)

The maximum Inverter number #n is specified by the operand B.
The scan execution status and the Inverter communication status are stored in the operand
B+2 to B+7.
The command data table is specified by the operand A and A+1.
When the instruction input is reset to OFF, the operation is stopped after receiving the
response from the Inverter currently communicating.

Example

D1000
D1001

Data table designation
4
2000

RW200
RW201
RW202
RW203
RW204
RW205
RW206
RW207

Parameter & status
5
0 (mode 0)
Execution status
Comm error code

D1010
D1011

RS-485 port
H0030 (fixed)
0 (fixed)

Inverter comms
status map

When the data for each operand are set as above, the following operation condition is specified.
• RW200=5 ⇒ The max Inverter number is 5. Therefore T1-16S scans from #0 through #5 Inverters.
• D1000=4 & D1001=2000 ⇒ D2000 is specified as the data table starting address.

Basic Hardware and Function

247

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
Data table:
Register
D2000
D2001
D2002
D2003
D2004
D2005
D2006
D2007

#0
#0
#0
#0
#1
#1
#1
#1

Data contents
Operating frequency
Output terminal status
Frequency reference
Operation command
Operating frequency
Output terminal status
Frequency reference
Operation command

Signal direction
← Read
← Read
→ Write
→ Write
← Read
← Read
→ Write
→ Write

D2020
D2021
D2022
D2023

#5
#5
#5
#5

Operating frequency
Output terminal status
Frequency reference
Operation command

← Read
← Read
→ Write
→ Write

• The data format for the operating frequency and the frequency reference registers are 0.01 Hz units.
For example, if it is 60 Hz, the corresponding register data is 6000.
• For the data format of the output terminal status register, refer to the Monitor mode (mode 1).
• The bit assignment of the operation command register is as follows. For details, refer to your
Inverter manual.
F

E

D

C

B

A

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

Programmed speed selection
0000 = None
0001 = Speed 1
0010 = Speed 2
:
1111 = Speed 15
PI operation (0 = Normal / 1 = Off)
DC braking (0 = Off / 1 = On)
Jog operation (0 = off / 1 = On)
F/R selection (0 = Forward / 1 = Reverse)
Run/Stop (0 = Stop / 1 = Run)
Free run (0 = Normal / 1 = Free run)
Emergency stop (0 = Normal / 1 = EMS)
Reset command (0 = Normal / 1 = Reset)
Frequency enable (0 = Disable / 1 = Enable)
Command enable (0 = Disable / 1 = Enable)

Example operation:
To operate the #0 Inverter at 30 Hz forward rotation, write the value 3000 in D2002 and HC400 in
D2003. (HC400 = Bits F, E, A are 1, and others are 0)
The current operating frequency and the output terminal status of the #0 Inverter are stored in D2000
and D2001 respectively.

248

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
< Monitor mode (Mode 1) >
When the instruction input comes ON with the operand B+1 is 1, the Monitor mode (mode 1) is
selected.
In this mode, the T1-16S sends the following Read commands to the Inverters starting from #0
through the Inverter number specified by the operand B, and repeats.

Scan

#0
#0
#1
#1
:
#n
#n

Operating frequency monitor (FD00)
Output terminal status monitor (FE07)
Operating frequency monitor (FD00)
Output terminal status monitor (FE07)
Operating frequency monitor (FD00)
Output terminal status monitor (FE07)

The maximum Inverter number #n is specified by the operand B.
The scan execution status and the Inverter communication status are stored in the operand
B+2 to B+7.
The monitor data table is specified by the operand A and A+1.
When the instruction input is reset to OFF, the operation is stopped after receiving the
response from the Inverter currently communicating.

Example

D1000
D1001

Data table designation
3
100

RW200
RW201
RW202
RW203
RW204
RW205
RW206
RW207

Parameter & status
19
1 (mode 1)
Execution status
Comm error code

D1010
D1011

RS-485 port
H0030 (fixed)
0 (fixed)

Inverter comms
status map

When the data for each operand are set as above, the following operation condition is specified.
• RW200=19 ⇒ The max Inverter number is 19. Therefore T1-16S scans from #0 through #19 Inverters.
• D1000=3 & D1001=100 ⇒ RW100 is specified as the data table starting address.

Basic Hardware and Function

249

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
Data table:
Register
RW100
RW101
RW102
RW103
RW104
RW105
RW106
RW107

Data contents
#0 Operating frequency
#0 Output terminal status
No use
No use
#1 Operating frequency
#1 Output terminal status
No use
No use

Signal direction
← Read
← Read
← Read
← Read

← Read
← Read

RW176 #19 Operating frequency
RW177 #19 Output terminal status
RW178
No use
RW179
No use

• The data format for the operating frequency register is 0.01 Hz units. For example, if it is 60 Hz, the
corresponding register data is 6000.
• The bit assignment of the output terminal status register is as follows. For details, refer to your
Inverter manual.
F

E

D

C

B

A

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

OUT1 (f130)
OUT2 (f131)
FL (f132)
R1 (f133)
R2 (f134)
OUT3 (f135)
OUT4 (f136)
ALM0
ALM1
ALM2
ALM3

Example operation:
The current operating frequency and the output terminal status of the #0 Inverter are stored in RW100
and RW101 respectively.
If the #0 Inverter is operating at 55 Hz, the data 5500 is stored in RW100. If the OUT2 terminal of the
#0 Inverter is ON, the bit 1 of RW101 (R1011) becomes 1.

250

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
< Read command mode (Mode 2) >
When the instruction input comes ON with the operand B+1 is 2, the Read command mode
(mode 2) is selected. In this mode, the T1-16S sends the user specified Read command to the
Inverter specified by the operand B, and repeats.

Repeat

Sends the specified command to #n Inverter
Receives the response and stores the data into the register

The target Inverter number #n is specified by the operand B.
The scan execution status and the Inverter communication status are stored in the operand
B+2 to B+7.
The command setting register and the response data storing register is indirectly specified by
the operand A and A+1.
When the instruction input is reset to OFF, the operation is stopped after receiving the
response from the Inverter.

Example

D1000
D1001

Data table designation
4
3000

RW200
RW201
RW202
RW203
RW204
RW205
RW206
RW207

Parameter & status
3
2 (mode 2)
Execution status
Comm error code

D1010
D1011

RS-485 port
H0030 (fixed)
0 (fixed)

Inverter comms
status map

When the data for each operand are set as above, the following operation condition is specified.
• RW200=3 ⇒ The target Inverter number is 3. Therefore T1-16S communicates with #3 Inverter.
• D1000=4 & D1001=3000 ⇒ D3000 is specified as the command setting register and D3001 is specified
as the response data storing register.

Data table:
Register
Data contents
D3000 Command code
D3001 Response data

Signal direction
← Read

Example operation:
For example, to read the output current from the #3 Inverter, set the command code HFE03 into
D3000. Then the response data is stored in D3001. If the response data is 1915, it means 19.15 %.
For the command code and the data format of the response, refer to your Inverter manual.

Basic Hardware and Function

251

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
< Write command mode (Mode 3) >
When the instruction input comes ON with the operand B+1 is 3, the Write command mode
(mode 3) is selected. In this mode, the T1-16S sends the user specified Write command to the
Inverter specified by the operand B, and repeats.

Repeat

Sends the specified command with command data to #n Inverter
Checks the acknowledge

The target Inverter number #n is specified by the operand B.
The scan execution status and the Inverter communication status are stored in the operand
B+2 to B+7.
The command code and the command data setting registers are indirectly specified by the
operand A and A+1.
When the instruction input is reset to OFF, the operation is stopped after receiving the
response from the Inverter.

Example

D1000
D1001

Data table designation
4
3010

RW200
RW201
RW202
RW203
RW204
RW205
RW206
RW207

Parameter & status
5
3 (mode 3)
Execution status
Comm error code

D1010
D1011

RS-485 port
H0030 (fixed)
0 (fixed)

Inverter comms
status map

When the data for each operand are set as above, the following operation condition is specified.
• RW200=5 ⇒ The target Inverter number is 5. Therefore T1-16S communicates with #5 Inverter.
• D1000=4 & D1001=3010 ⇒ D3010 is specified as the command code setting register and D3011 is
specified as the command data setting register.

Data table:
Register
Data contents
D3010 Command code
D3011 Command data

Signal direction
→ Write

Example operation:
For example, to write the acceleration time parameter (10 seconds) to the #5 Inverter, set the
command code H0009 into D3010 and the value 100 into D3011.
For the command code and the command data format, refer to your Inverter manual.

252

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
< Broadcast mode (Mode 4) >
When the instruction input comes ON with the operand B+1 is 4, the Broadcast mode (mode 4)
is selected. In this mode, the T1-16S sends the user specified Write command to all the
Inverters as broadcast.
This mode is useful to send Run/Stop command to all the Inverter at the same time.

Repeat

Sends the specified command with command data to all Inverters (broadcast)
Checks the acknowledge from #0 Inverter

The Inverter number specified by the operand B is ignored.
The scan execution status and the Inverter communication status are stored in the operand
B+2 to B+7. (only #0 Inverter responds)
The command code and the command data setting registers are indirectly specified by the
operand A and A+1.
When the instruction input is reset to OFF, the operation is stopped after receiving the
response from the Inverter.

Example

D1000
D1001

Data table designation
4
3020

RW200
RW201
RW202
RW203
RW204
RW205
RW206
RW207

Parameter & status
(any 0 to 63)
4 (mode 4)
Execution status
Comm error code

D1010
D1011

RS-485 port
H0030 (fixed)
0 (fixed)

Inverter comms
status map

When the data for each operand are set as above, the following operation condition is specified.
• D1000=4 & D1001=3020 ⇒ D3020 is specified as the command code setting register and D3021 is
specified as the command data setting register.

Data table:
Register
Data contents
D3020 Command code
D3021 Command data

Signal direction
→ Write

Example operation:
For example, to send the Run forward command to all the Inverters, set the command code HFA00
into D3020 and the value HC400 into D3021.
For the command code and the command data format, refer to your Inverter manual.

Basic Hardware and Function

253

6F3B0253

7. Instructions
< Note >
(1) The XFER instruction is not executed as error in the following cases. In these cases, the instruction error
flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON. If the ERF is set to ON once, it remains ON until resetting to OFF by
user program.
• The RS-485 port designation is other than H0030 and 0.
• The Inverter number designation is other than 0 to 63.
• Operation mode setting for RS-485 port is other than the Inverter connection mode.
(2) This XFER instruction must be programmed in the Main program.
(3) During the instruction input is ON, the data contents in the data table specified by A can be changed.
However, parameters specified by B cannot be changed.
(4) In the Data exchange mode (mode 0) and the Monitor mode (mode 1), the T1-16S scans from #0 to the
specified number. Therefore the Inverter number should be consecutive starting with 0.
If an Inverter is disconnected from the network, the T1-16S checks its existence periodically. When you
turn off power to an Inverter for maintenance purpose and turn on again, it is recommended to reset the
instruction input to re-configure the network.

254

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Section 8
Special I/O Functions

8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7

Special I/O function overview, 256
Variable input filter constant, 260
High speed counter, 261
Interrupt input function, 268
Analog setting function, 270
Pulse output function, 271
PWM output function, 273

Basic Hardware and Function

255

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions
8.1 Special I/O function overview
The T1-16S supports the special I/O functions as listed below.
Function name
Variable input filter
constant

Function summary
Input filter constant (ON/OFF delay time) can be set
by user program. The setting range is 0 to 15ms
(1ms units). Default value is 10ms. This function is
applied for X000 to X007 (8 points as a block).
High
Single phase Counts the number of pulses of single phase pulse
speed
up-counter
train. 2 channels of pulse input are available. The
counter
countable pulse rate is up to 5KHz for each channel.
Channel 1 … X000 count input, X002 reset input
Channel 2 … X001 count input, X003 reset input
Single phase Counts the number of pulses in a specified sampling
speedtime. The sampling time setting is 10 to 1000ms
counter
(10ms units). 2 channels of pulse input are available.
The countable pulse rate is up to 5KHz for each
channel.
Channel 1 … X000 count input
Channel 2 … X001 count input
Quadrature Counts the 2-phase pulses whose phases are shifted
bi-pulse
90° each other. Counts up when phase A precedes,
counter
and counts down when phase B precedes.
The countable pulse rate is up to 5KHz.
Phase A … X000
Phase B … X001
Reset …… X002
Interrupt input function Immediately activates the corresponding I/O interrupt
program when the interrupt input is changed from
OFF to ON (or ON to OFF). 2 points of interrupt input
are available.
X002 … Interrupt 1 (I/O interrupt program #3)
X003 … Interrupt 2 (I/O interrupt program #4)
Analog setting
The value of the analog setting adjuster is converted
function
into digital value (0 to 1000) and stored in the SW
register. 2 adjusters are provided on the T1-16S.
V0 … SW30
V1 … SW31
Pulse output function Variable frequency pulse train can be output. The
available pulse rate is 50 to 5000Hz (1Hz units).
Y020 … CW or Pulse (PLS)
Y021 … CCW or Direction (DIR)
PWM output function Variable duty cycle pulse train can be output. The
available ON duty setting is 0 to 100% (1% units).
Y020 … PWM output

256

T1-16S User’s Manual

Remarks
SW16 setting
is necessary to
use this
function. (Note)
Only one
among these 4
functions can
be selected.
SW16 is used
to select the
function.
(Note)

No function
selection is
required.

Either one
between these
2 functions
can be used.
SW26 is used
to select the
function. (Note)

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions
Mode setting for the special I/O functions
These functions, except the analog setting function, are selected by setting data into
SW16 and SW26 by user program. These registers work as mode setting registers for
the special I/O functions. The data setting for these registers, i.e. mode setting for the
special I/O functions, is effective only at the first scan.
Note) In the explanation below, HSC and INT mean the high speed counter and the
interrupt input functions respectively.
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

SW16

0

0 0

0 0
Bit 0 < HSC and INT master flag >
0: No use
1: Use
Bit 1 < HSC / INT selection >
0: INT
1: HSC
Bits 2 and 3 < INT No.1 mode >
00: No use (Reserve)
01: Rising (OFF to ON)
10: Falling (ON to OFF)
11: No use (Reserve)
Bits 6 and 7 < INT No.2 mode >
00: No use (Reserve)
01: Rising (OFF to ON)
10: Falling (ON to OFF)
11: No use (Reserve)
Bits A and B < HSC mode >
00: Single phase up-counter
01: Single phase speed-counter
10: Quadrature bi-pulse counter
11: No use (Reserve)
Bits C and D < Enable flag for HSC / INT >
00: CH2 - disable, CH1 - disable
01: CH2 - disable, CH1 - enable
10: CH2 - enable, CH1 - disable
11: CH2 - enable, CH1 - enable
Bit F < Variable input filter constant >
0: No use (fixed to 10ms)
1: Use

Basic Hardware and Function

257

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions
Note) In the explanation below, P-OUT means the pulse output function.
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

SW26

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 0 < P-OUT and PWM master flag >
0: No use
1: Use
Bit 1 < P-OUT / PWM selection >
0: PWM
1: P-OUT
Bit 2 < PLS mode >
0: CW/CCW
1: Pulse/Direction (PLS/DIR)

P-OUT / PWM operation error flag
(These are not user setting items)
Bit D < PWM pulse width error >
0: Normal
1: Error
Bit E < PWM ON duty setting error >
0: Normal
1: Error
Bit F < Frequency setting error >
0: Normal
1: Error

258

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions
The table below summarizes the mode setting data of each function. In the table,
‘−’ means do not care.
SW16

Variable input filter constant

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 0 − − − − 0 0 − − 0 0 − − − −

Use

SW16

High speed counter

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Single phase
up-counter

Channel 1 only
Channel 2 only
Both channels
Single phase
Channel 1 only
speed-counter
Channel 2 only
Both channels
Quadrature bi-pulse counter

−
−
−
−
−
−
−

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
1
1
0
1
1
0

1
0
1
1
0
1
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
1

0
0
0
1
1
1
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

SW16

Interrupt input function

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Interrupt 1 only Rising (OFF to ON)
Falling (ON to OFF)
Interrupt 2 only Rising (OFF to ON)
Falling (ON to OFF)
Both interrupts No.1 = Rising, No.2 = Rising
1 and 2
No.1 = Rising, No.2 = Falling
No.1 = Falling, No.2 = Rising
No.1 = Falling, No.2 =
Falling

Pulse output function

−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1

0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1

1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

SW26
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CW/CCW method
Pulse/Direction (PLS/DIR) method

PWM output function

− − − 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
− − − 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
SW26
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

− − − 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

Use

For example, the following programs can be used to select the quadrature bi-pulse
counter.

or
(H0803)

Basic Hardware and Function

259

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions
8.2 Variable input filter constant
Function
The input filter constant (ON/OFF delay time) of the leading 8 points X000 to X007
can be specified by user program within the range of 0 to 15ms. The default is 10ms.
The setting value is recognized at the first scan. Therefore, it cannot be changed after
the second scan.
Related registers
SW16

Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.

SW17

Input filter constant value
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

No use (set to 0)

Setting value
0 to 15
Operation
Input signal
T

T

Internal logic
Scan cycle
X device
T: Input filter constant (0 to 15ms)
Sample program

This program sets the input filter constant to 3ms.

260

T1-16S User’s Manual

T

T

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions
8.3 High speed counter
8.3.1

Single phase up-counter
Function
When the count input is changed from OFF to ON, the count value is increased by 1.
When the count value reaches the set value, the count value is reset to 0, and I/O
interrupt program is activated (if the interrupt enable flag is ON). The count value is
reset to 0 when the reset input comes ON.
This counter operation is enabled while the soft-gate is ON. The count value is reset to
0 when the soft-gate is changed from ON to OFF.
The set value is set internally at the timing of the soft-gate changing from OFF to ON.
When the soft-gate is OFF, the count value can be changed by writing the data into
the set value register and setting the count preset flag to ON.
The count value range is H0000 to HFFFF (16-bit data).
Hardware condition
Count input (X000 and X001)
ON/OFF pulse width: 100µs or more (max. 5KHz)
Reset input (X002 and X003)
ON/OFF duration:
2ms or more
Related registers
SW16: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.
Function
Count input
Reset input
Set value
Count value
Soft-gate
Interrupt enable
Count preset

Register/device
Channel 1
Channel 2
X000
X001
X002
X003
SW18
SW20
SW22
SW23
S240
S248
S241
S249
S243
S24B

Remarks
(Note)
Data range: H0000 to HFFFF
Operation is enabled when ON
Interrupt is enabled when ON
Used to preset the counter value

Note) When both channels are used, X000 to X003 cannot be used as normal
input devices. However, if either one channel is used, these inputs for unused
channel can be used as normal input devices.
Interrupt assignment
Channel 1 … I/O interrupt program #1
Channel 2 … I/O interrupt program #2

Basic Hardware and Function

261

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions
Operation

Count input
Reset input
Soft-gate
Set value

Count value
Interrupt

Sample program
(H1003)

In this example, 4099 (H1003) is set in SW16. As a result, the single phase upcounter (channel 1 only) is selected.
When R010 comes ON, the data 2000 is written into the set value register (SW18).
While R010 is ON, the soft-gate (S240) and the interrupt enable flag (S241) are set to
ON to enable the counter operation.
The counter works as a ring counter with the set value 2000. The count value is stored
in SW22.
When R010 is OFF and R011 comes ON, the count value is preset to the data of
D0100.

262

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions
8.3.2

Single phase speed-counter
Function
This function counts the number of changes of the count input from OFF to ON during
the every specified sampling time. The count value in a sampling time is stored in the
hold value register.
This counter operation is enabled while the soft-gate is ON. When the soft-gate is
OFF, the hold value is cleared to 0.
The setting range of the sampling time is 10 to 1000ms (10ms units).
The count value range is H0000 to HFFFF (16-bit).
Hardware condition
Count input (X000 and X001)
ON/OFF pulse width: 100µs or more (max. 5KHz)
Related registers
SW16: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.
Function
Count input
Sampling time
Hold value
Soft-gate

Register/device
Channel 1
Channel 2
X000
X001
SW18
SW20
SW22
SW23
S240
S248

Remarks
(Note 2)
Data range: 1 to 100 (Note 1)
Data range: H0000 to HFFFF
Operation is enabled when ON

Note 1) The setting data range of the sampling time is 1 to 100. (10ms multiplier)
Note 2) When both channels are used, X000 and X001 cannot be used as normal
input devices. However, if either one channel is used, the input for unused
channel can be used as normal input devices.
Interrupt assignment
No interrupt function.

Basic Hardware and Function

263

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions
Operation

Count input
Sampling time

∆T

∆T

a

b

∆T

∆T

∆T

∆T

Soft-gate

Internal
count value

e

c
d

e

c
a

b

d

Hold value

Sample program
(H1403)

In this example, 5123 (H1403) is set in SW16. As a result, the single phase speedcounter (channel 1 only) is selected.
The sampling time is set as 100ms, because 10 is written in SW18.
While R010 is ON, the soft-gate (S240) is set to ON, and the speed-counter works.
The hold value is stored in SW22.

264

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions
8.3.3

Quadrature bi-pulse counter
Function
This function counts up or down the quadrature bi-pulse (2-phase pulses whose
phases are shifted 90° each other). Counts up when phase A precedes, and counts
down when phase B precedes. Both rising and falling edges of each phase are
counted. Consequently, 4 times count value against the pulse frequency is obtained.
Phase A
Phase B
Up count

Down count

When the count value reaches the comparison value 1 (or 2), the I/O interrupt
program #1 (or #2) is activated (if the interrupt enable flag for each is ON).
This counter operation is enabled while the soft-gate is ON. The count value is reset to
0 when the soft-gate is changed from ON to OFF. The count value is also reset to 0
when the reset input comes ON.
When the soft-gate is OFF, the count value can be changed by writing the data into
the comparison value 1 (or 2) register and setting the count preset flag 1 (or 2) to ON.
The comparison value 1 and 2 can be changed even when the soft-gate is ON.
The count value range is -2147483648 to 2147483647 (32-bit data).
Hardware condition
Phase A and phase B (X000 and X001)
ON/OFF pulse width: 100µs or more (max. 5KHz)
Reset input (X002)
ON/OFF duration:
2ms or more
Related registers
SW16: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.
Function
Phase A
Phase B
Reset input
Comparison value 1
Comparison value 2
Count value
Soft-gate
Interrupt enable 1
Count preset 1
Interrupt enable 2
Count preset 2

Register/device
X000
X001
X002
SW19⋅SW18
SW21⋅SW20
SW23⋅SW22
S240
S241
S243
S249
S24B

Remarks

Data range: -2147483648 to 2147483647

Operation is enabled when ON
Interrupt 1 is enabled when ON
Used to preset the count value
Interrupt 2 is enabled when ON
Used to preset the count value

Basic Hardware and Function

265

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions
Interrupt assignment
Comparison value 1 … I/O interrupt program #1
Comparison value 2 … I/O interrupt program #2
Operation

Up count
Down count
Reset input
Soft-gate
2147483647
Comparison
value 1

Count value
Comparison
value 2
-2147483648

Interrupt
1

266

T1-16S User’s Manual

1 1

2

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions
Sample program
(H0803)

In this example, 2051 (H0803) is set in SW16. As a result, the quadrature bi-pulse
counter is selected.
When R010 comes ON, the data 150000 is set into the comparison value 1 register
(SW19⋅SW18), and 200000 is set into the comparison value 2 register (SW21 ⋅SW20).
While R010 is ON, the soft-gate (S240), the interrupt enable flag 1 (S241) and the
interrupt enable flag 2 (S249) are set to ON to enable the counter operation.
The count value is stored in SW23⋅SW22.
When R010 is OFF and R011 comes ON, the count value is preset to the data of
D0101⋅D0100.

Basic Hardware and Function

267

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions
8.4 Interrupt input function
Function
When the signal state of the interrupt input is changed from OFF to ON (or ON to
OFF), the corresponding I/O interrupt program is activated immediately.
Up to 2 interrupt inputs can be used. The interrupt generation condition can be
selected either rising edge (OFF to ON) or falling edge (ON to OFF) for each input.
The I/O interrupt program #3 is corresponding to the interrupt input 1, and the I/O
interrupt program #4 is corresponding to the interrupt input 2.
Hardware condition
Interrupt input (X002 and X003)
ON/OFF pulse width: 100µs or more
Related registers
SW16: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.
Interrupt input 1
Interrupt input 2

X002
X003

Interrupt assignment
Interrupt input 1 … I/O interrupt program #3
Interrupt input 2 … I/O interrupt program #4
Operation
Interrupt input 1
Interrupt input 2
Interrupt
3

4

3

4

The above operation example is the case of rising edge setting for both inputs.

268

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions
Sample program
Main program
(H3045)

I/O interrupt program #3

Interrupt program A

I/O interrupt program #4

Interrupt program B

In this example, 12357 (H3045) is set in SW16. As a result, the interrupt input function
(2 points, rising for both) is selected.
When X002 is changed from OFF to ON, the interrupt program A is executed. When
X003 is changed from OFF to ON, the interrupt program B is executed.

NOTE

Even if the Direct I/O instruction is used in the interrupt program, the
corresponding input state (X002 or X003) cannot be confirmed. Because
the interrupt is generated before internal updating of the input states.

Basic Hardware and Function

269

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions
8.5 Analog setting function
Function
The value of the analog setting adjuster is converted into a digital value (0 to 1000)
and stored in the SW register. 2 adjusters are provided. (V0 and V1)
The SW register data can be used as timer presets or any parameters for function
instructions.
Related registers
Function
Adjuster V0
Adjuster V1

Register
SW30
SW31

Remarks
Data range: 0 to 1000

Operation
Decrease

Increase

Decrease

Increase

V0

V1

SW30 (0 to 1000)

SW31 (0 to 1000)

Sample program

The above example is a simple flicker circuit of Y020. In this example, the ON/OFF
interval of Y020 can be controlled by the adjuster V0.

270

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions
8.6 Pulse output function
Function
This function is used to output a variable frequency pulse train. The controllable pulse
frequency is 50 to 5000 Hz (1 Hz units).
The output mode can be selected either CW/CCW or Pulse/Direction (PLS/DIR).
In the CW/CCW mode, CW pulse is output when the frequency setting is positive (50
to 5000), and CCW pulse is output when it is negative (-50 to -5000).
In the PLS/DIR mode, DIR is OFF when the frequency setting is positive (50 to 5000),
and DIR is ON when it is negative (-50 to -5000).
< CW/CCW mode >
CW
CCW

< PLS/DIR mode >
PLS
DIR

In the both modes, pulse output is enabled when the pulse enable flag is ON. While
the pulse enable flag is ON, the pulse frequency can be changed by changing the
frequency setting value. However, the pulse direction (the sign of the frequency
setting) cannot be changed when the pulse enable flag is ON.
This function can be used to control the speed of a stepping motor, etc.
Related registers
SW26: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.
Function
CW/CCW
PLS/DIR
CW pulse
PLS
CCW pulse
DIR
Pulse enable flag
Frequency setting register
Frequency setting error flag

Register/
device
Y020
Y021
S270
SW28
S26F

Remarks

Output is enabled when ON
Data range: -5000 to -50, 50 to 5000
ON at error (reset OFF automatically)

Note) The allowable value range of the frequency setting (SW28) is -5000 to -50 and
50 to 5000. If the value is out of this range or the sign is changed while the
pulse enable flag (S270) is ON, the frequency setting error flag (S26F) comes
ON. (Pulse output operation is continued with previous frequency setting)

Basic Hardware and Function

271

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions
Operation

Pulse enable

Frequency setting

100

+

1000

300

-100

-1000

-300

1KHz

Frequency
100Hz

300Hz

Pulse output
100Hz

-

300Hz
1KHz

Sample program

In this example, 3 (H0003) is set in SW26. As a result, the CW/CCW mode pulse
output function is selected.
When R000 is ON, the pulse output is started with the frequency designated by
D0100.
If an invalid frequency is designated, the frequency setting error flag (S26F) comes
ON and the pulse enable flag (S270) is turned OFF. Then the pulse output is stopped.

272

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions
8.7 PWM output function
Function
This function is used to output a variable duty cycle pulse train. The controllable duty
cycle is 0 to 100 % (1 % units).
ON duty

50%

70%

60%

T

T

T

PWM
T = Pulse cycle

The PWM output is enabled when the pulse enable flag is ON. While the pulse enable
flag is ON, the duty cycle (ON duty) can be changed by changing the duty setting
value (0 to 100).
The frequency setting is available in the range of 50 to 5000 Hz (1 Hz units) before
turning ON the pulse enable flag. The frequency changing is not allowed while the
pulse enable is ON.
Note that the minimum ON/OFF pulse duration is 100 µs. Therefore, the controllable
ON duty range is limited depending on the frequency setting as follows. If the ON duty
setting value is not available (within 0 to 100), the pulse width error flag comes ON.
(PWM output operation is continued but the duty cycle is not guaranteed)
Frequency
50 - 100 Hz
200 Hz
1000 Hz
5000 Hz

Cycle time
20 - 10 ms
5 ms
1 ms
200 µs

Available ON duty
0 to 100 %
0, 2 to 98, 100 %
0, 10 to 90, 100 %
0, 50, 100 %

Related registers
SW26: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.
Function
PWM pulse
Pulse enable flag
Frequency setting register
ON duty setting register
Pulse width error flag
ON duty setting error flag
Frequency setting error flag

Register/
device
Y020
S270
SW28
SW29
S26D
S26E
S26F

Remarks

Output is enabled when ON
Data range: 50 to 5000
Data range: 0 to 100
ON at error (reset OFF automatically)
ON at error (reset OFF automatically)
ON at error (reset OFF automatically)

Note) If the setting value of SW28 or SW29 is out of the allowable range, the
frequency setting error flag (S26F) or the ON duty setting error flag (S26E)
comes ON. (PWM output operation is continued with previous ON duty setting)

Basic Hardware and Function

273

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions
Operation

Pulse enable

ON duty setting

10

20

30

70%

ON duty
PWM output

70

10%

20%

60

60%

70
70%

30%

Sample program

In this example, 1 (H0001) is set in SW26 and 100 is set in SW28. As a result, 100 Hz
PWM output function is selected.
When R005 is ON, the PWM output is started with the duty cycle designated by
D0200.
If an invalid ON duty is designated, the ON duty setting error flag (S26E) comes ON
and the pulse enable flag (S270) is turned OFF. Then the PWM output is stopped.

274

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Section 9
Maintenance and Checks

9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5

Precautions during operation, 276
Daily checks, 277
Periodic checks, 278
Maintenance parts, 279
Battery, 280

Basic Hardware and Function

275

6F3B0253

9. Maintenance and Checks
9.1 Precautions during operation
When the T1-16S is in operation, you should pay attention to the following items.
(1) The programmer cable can be plugged or unplugged while the T1-16S is in
operation. When you try to do it, do not touch the connector pins. This may cause
malfunction of the T1-16S owing to static electricity.
(2) Do not plug nor unplug the expansion cable during power on. This can cause
damage to the equipment. Furthermore, to avoid malfunction of the T1-16S owing
to static electricity, do not touch the cable ends.
(3) Do not touch any terminals while the T1-16S is in operation, even if the terminals
are not live parts. This may cause malfunction of the T1-16S owing to static
electricity.
(4) Do not touch the expansion connector pins while the T1-16S is in operation. This
may cause malfunction of the T1-16S owing to static electricity.
Fix the expansion connector cover if the expansion connector is not used.
(5) Turn off power when a battery installs and removes.

276

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

9. Maintenance and Checks
9.2 Daily checks

! CAUTION

1. Pay special attention during the maintenance work to minimize the risk
of electrical shock.
2. Turn off power immediately if the T1-16S or related equipment is
emitting smoke or odor. Operation under such situation can cause fire
or electrical shock.

To maintain the system and to prevent troubles, check the following items on daily
basis.
Item
Status LEDs

Mode control
switch

Input LEDs

Output LEDs

Check
Lit when internal 5V is
normal.
Lit when operating
normally.
FLT (fault)
Not lit when operating
normally.
Check that the mode control switch is
in R (RUN) side. Normal operation is
performed when this switch is in R
(RUN) side.
Lit when the corresponding input is
ON.
PWR
(power)
RUN

Lit when the output is ON and the
corresponding load should operate.

Corrective measures
If the LEDs are not normal, see
10. Troubleshooting.

Turn this switch to R (RUN) side.

• Check that the input terminal
screw is not loose.
• Check that the input terminal
block is not loose.
• Check that the input voltage is
within the specified range.
• Check that the output terminal
screw is not loose.
• Check that the output terminal
block is not loose.
• Check that the output voltage
is within the specified range.

Basic Hardware and Function

277

6F3B0253

9. Maintenance and Checks
9.3 Periodic checks

! CAUTION

1. Pay special attention during the maintenance work to minimize the risk
of electrical shock.
2. Turn off power immediately if the T1-16S or related equipment is
emitting smoke or odor. Operation under such situation can cause fire
or electrical shock.

Check the T1-16S based on the following items every six months. Also perform
checks when the operating environment is changed.
Item
Power supply

Installation
condition

Input/output

278

T1-16S User’s Manual

Check
Measure the power voltage at the T116S’s power terminals.
Check that the terminal screw is not
loose.
Check that the power cable is not
damaged.
Check that the unit is installed
securely.
Check that the I/O module is inserted
securely. (if any)
Check that the expansion rack/unit is
installed securely. (if any)
Check that the expansion cable is
connected securely and the cable is
not damaged. (if any)
Check that the I/O module on the
expansion rack is inserted securely. (if
any)
Measure the input/output voltage at
the T1-16S’s terminals.
Check the input status LEDs.
Check the output status LEDs.
Check that the terminal block is
installed securely.
Check that the terminal screw is not
loose and the terminal has a sufficient
distance to the next terminal.
Check that the each I/O wire is not
damaged.

Criteria
85 - 132/170 - 264Vac (AC PS)
20.4 - 28.8Vdc (DC PS)
Not loose
Not damaged
Not loose, no play
Not loose, no play
Not loose, no play
Not loose, not damaged

Not loose, no play

The voltage must be within the
specified range.
The LED must light normally.
The LED must light normally.
Not loose, no play
Not loose, not contacting the
next terminal
Not damaged

6F3B0253

9. Maintenance and Checks
(Periodic checks - continued)
Item
Environment

Check
Check that the temperature, humidity,
vibration, dust, etc. are within the
specified range.
Programming tool Check that the functions of the
programming tool are normal.
Check that the connector and cable
are not damaged.
User program
Check that the T1-16S program and
the master program (saved on a floppy
disk, etc.) are the same.

Criteria
Must be within the range of
general specification.
Monitoring and other operations
are available.
Not damaged
No compare error

9.4 Maintenance parts
To recover from trouble quickly, it is recommended to keep the following spare parts.
Item
T1-16S basic unit

Quantity
1

Programming tool
Master program
Expansion rack or
unit (if any)
I/O module
(if any)
Fuse for I/O
module (if any)
Battery (CR2032)

1
As required
1

Remarks
Prepare at least one to minimize the down-time
of the controlled system.
Useful for the troubleshooting procedure.
Saved on a floppy disk, etc.

One of each type
used
One of each type
used
1

These spare parts should not be stored in high temperature and/or humidity locations.

Basic Hardware and Function

279

6F3B0253

9. Maintenance and Checks
9.5 Battery
(1) Install
+ side

Insert the battery by an angle of 45°.
(Turn + side into an upside.)

(1) Push the battery horizontal direction.
(2) Push from upside and lock.

(2) Eject
Push the center of the tab by a finger or a pen. Then
the battery will be unlocked.

Remove the battery.

NOTE

1. Turn off power when installing or removing the battery for safety.
2. The battery type is CR2032. Do not use other types of battery. Use of
another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion.
3. Dispose of used battery promptly. Keep away from children. Do not
disassemble and do not dispose of in fire.

280

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Section 10
Troubleshooting

10.1 Troubleshooting procedure, 282
10.2 Self-diagnostic items, 288

Basic Hardware and Function

281

6F3B0253

10. Troubleshooting
10.1 Troubleshooting procedure

! CAUTION

1. Pay special attention during the troubleshooting to minimize the risk of
electrical shock.
2. Turn off power immediately if the T1-16S or related equipment is
emitting smoke or odor. Operation under such situation can cause fire
or electrical shock.
3. Turn off power before removing or replacing units, modules, terminal
blocks or wires. Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage
to the T1 and related equipment.
4. Contact Toshiba for repairing if the T1-16S or related equipment is
failed. Toshiba will not guarantee proper operation nor safety for
unauthorized repairing.

If a trouble occurs, determine whether the cause lies in the mechanical side or in the
control system (PLC) side. A problem may cause a secondary problem, therefore, try
to determine the cause of trouble by considering the whole system.
If the problem is found in the T1-16S, check the following points:

PWR (power) LED
Not lit

Follow the procedure in
10.1.1 Power supply check

Not lit

Follow the procedure in
10.1.2 CPU check

Not normal

Follow the procedure in
10.1.3 Program check

Not normal

Follow the procedure in
10.1.4 Input check

Not normal

Follow the procedure in
10.1.5 Output check

Lit
RUN LED
Lit
User program
Normal operation
Input operation
Normal operation
Output operation

Also refer to section 10.1.6 for environmental problem.

282

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

10. Troubleshooting
10.1.1 Power supply check
If the PWR (power) LED is not lit after power on, check the following points.

Check the power connection

Connection terminals are correct.
The terminal screws are not loose.
The terminal block is installed securely.

Correct
Check the power voltage
at the T1-16S’s terminal

85 to 132/170 to 264Vac (50/60 Hz)
or 20.4 to 28.8Vdc (DC power)

Normal
Remove the programmer
port connector

If the PWR LED becomes normal, the
internal 5Vdc can be shorted in the
external connections of this port.

Still unlit
Remove the 24Vdc service
power terminals if it is used

If the PWR LED becomes normal, the
24Vdc service power can be over load.

Still unlit
Remove the I/O modules.

If the PWR LED is still unlit, the T1-16S
basic unit may be faulty. Replace the unit.

Lit
Confirm the internal 5Vdc
current consumption if
I/O module is used.

The 5Vdc capacity for I/O modules is
max. 1.5A.
(Refer to section 2.1.)

Within the limit
Insert the removed option
modules one by one to
pinpoint the faulty card.

Replace the faulty I/O module.

Basic Hardware and Function

283

6F3B0253

10. Troubleshooting
10.1.2 CPU check
If the PWR (power) LED is lit but the RUN LED is not lit, check the following points.

Check the position of the
mode control switch

If it is not in R (RUN) position, turn the
switch to R (RUN) position.

Check the FLT (fault) LED

If the FLT LED is lit or blinking, the T1-16S
is in the ERROR mode. Confirm the error
message by connecting the
tool. Refer to section 10.2.

programming
Is the RUN LED blinking ?
whether the
not used.

Connect the programming
tool, and check the T1-16S’s
status

If it is blinking, the T1-16S is in the HOLD
mode. Check your program
HOLD device (S401) is

If the T1-16S stays in HALT mode even
when the mode control switch is changed,
the switch may be faulty.
If the communication between the T1-16S
and the programming tool is not possible,
the T1-16S may be faulty.

10.1.3 Program check
Check the user program based on the following points if it is running but the operation
does not work as intended.
(1) Whether duplicated coils are not programmed.
(2) Whether a coil device and a destination of a function instruction are not
overlapping.
(3) Whether the ON/OFF duration of an external input signal is not shorter than the
T1-16S’s scan time.
(4) Whether a register/device, which is used in the main program, is not operated
erroneously in the interrupt program.

NOTE

284

When you write/modify the program, it is necessary to execute the
EEPROM write operation before turning off power to the T1. Otherwise the
old program stored in the built-in EEPROM will be over-written, and your
program modification will disappear.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

10. Troubleshooting
10.1.4 Input check
If the program is running but the external input signal is not read normally, check the
following points:

Is the input status LED
changed ON/OFF according
to the corresponding input
device operation ?
Yes
Connect the programming
tool, and monitor the
corresponding X device state
in RUN mode

If not, check the input voltage at the
T1-16S’s input terminals.
If the voltage is not normal, check the input
device and the cable.
If the voltage is normal, the T1-16S’s input
circuit may be faulty.
If the monitored X device state is identical
to the state of the input status LED, the
cause may lie in the user program or in the
environment.

Not normal
Check whether the X device
is forced or not

If it is forced, release the force designation
then execute the EEPROM write
operation.

Not forced
Check whether the I/O
allocation table is identical to
the actual I/O configuration

If identical, the T1-16S’s internal circuit or
the input circuit may be faulty.

Not identical
Execute the automatic I/O
allocation, and check whether
the I/O allocation table is now
identical to the actual I/O
configuration

If it becomes identical, execute the
EEPROM write operation.

Still not identical
Is the allocation mismatch for
a specific I/O module?

If so, the card, module or expansion unit
may be faulty. For expansion unit, check
the expansion cable also.

Basic Hardware and Function

285

6F3B0253

10. Troubleshooting
10.1.5 Output check
If the output status monitored on the programming tool is normal but the external
output device (load) is not operated normally, check the following points:

No

Is the output status LED
changed ON/OFF according
to the program execution ?
Yes
Check the voltage between
the output terminal and its
common terminal.
It should be 0V when the
output is ON, and it should
be the circuit voltage when
the output is OFF.

If it is the circuit voltage at the output is
ON, or if it is 0V at the output is OFF with
the load ON, the T1-16S’s output circuit
may be faulty.
If it is 0V and the load is also OFF, check
the output power and the output cable
connections.

Normal
Check the voltage at the load

Check whether the I/O
allocation table is identical to
the actual I/O configuration

If it is not normal, check the output cable
connections.
If it is normal, check the specification of
the load, also check environmental factors.

If identical, the T1-16S’s internal circuit or
the output circuit may be faulty.

Not identical
Execute the automatic I/O
allocation, and check whether
the I/O allocation table is now
identical to the actual I/O
configuration

If it becomes identical, execute the
EEPROM write operation.

Still not identical
Is the allocation mismatch for
a specific I/O module?

286

T1-16S User’s Manual

If so, the card, module or expansion unit
may be faulty. For expansion unit, check
the expansion cable also.

6F3B0253

10. Troubleshooting
10.1.6 Environmental problem
If the following improper operations occur in the controlled system, check possible
environmental factors.
(1) If an improper operation occurs synchronously with the operation of I/O devices:
The noise generated at ON/OFF of the output device (load) may be the cause of
the problem. Take necessary measures mentioned in section 3.
(2) If an improper operation occurs synchronously with the operation of surrounding
equipment or high-frequency equipment:
The noise induced in I/O signal lines may be the cause of the problem. The surge
voltage, voltage fluctuations, or differences of grounding potentials may cause
the problem, depending on the power supply system or the grounding system.
Check the operation in accordance with the precautions in section 4. For some
cases, isolation from the ground may lead to the stable operation.
(3) If an improper operation occurs synchronously with the operation of machinery:
The vibration of the equipment may cause the problem. Check that the installation
status of the units and take necessary measures.
(4) If a similar failure is repeated after the unit is replaced:
Check that no metal debris or water drops has been entered into the unit/module.

Apart from the above points, consider climatic conditions. If the ambient temperature
is beyond the specified range, stable operation of the system is not guaranteed.

Basic Hardware and Function

287

6F3B0253

10. Troubleshooting
10.2 Self-diagnostic items
If an error is detected by the self-diagnostic check of the T1-16S CPU, the error
messages and the related information shown on the following pages will be recorded
in the T1-16S’s event history table. If the error is severe and continuation of operation
is not possible, the T1-16S turns OFF all outputs and stops the operation (ERROR
mode).
The latest 15 error messages are stored in the event history table. This event history
table can be displayed on the programming tool. (Power ON/OFF is also registered)
If the T1-16S has entered into ERROR mode, connect the programming tool to the T116S to confirm the error message in the event history table. This information is
important to recover from a trouble. For the key operations on the programming tool to
display the event history table, refer to the separate manual for the programming tool.
(An example of the event history)
< Event History>

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Date

Time

98-02-21
98-02-21
98-02-21
98-01-15
98-01-14
98-01-14

16:48:01
15:55:26
12:03:34
09:27:12
19:11:43
10:39:11

Event
I/O no answer
System power on
System power off
System power on
System power off
No END/IRET error

Count
3
1
1
1
1
3

Info 1

Info 2

#00-04

M-001

H0024

Info 3

Mode
RUN Down
INIT.
RUN
INIT.
HALT
HALT Down

In the event history table, No.1 message indicates the latest event recorded.
Each column shows the following information.
Date: The date when the error has detected (Enhanced model only)
Time: The time when the error has detected (Enhanced model only)
Event: Error message
Count: Number of times the error has detected by retry action
Info n: Related information to the error detected
Mode: T1-16S’s operation mode in which the error has detected (INIT. means the
power-up initialization)
Down: Shows the T1-16S has entered into ERROR mode by the error detected

If the T1-16S is in the ERROR mode, operations to correct the program are not
accepted.
In this case, execute the Error reset operation by the programming tool to return the
HALT mode before starting the correction operation.

288

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

10. Troubleshooting
Error message and related information
Event
Info 1
Info 2
Info 3
Batt voltage drop

Boundary error

Program Address
type in the
block No. block

Clock-calendar error

Duplicate entry No.

Program Address
type in the
block No. block

EEPROM BCC error

Illegal
BCC

EEPROM warning

Number
of excess
writing

I/O bus error

Unit No.

I/O mismatch

Unit No. - Register
slot No. No.

I/O no answer

Unit No. - Register
slot No. No.

I/O parity error

Unit No. - Register
slot No. No.

Illegal I/O reg

Unit No. - Register
slot No. No.

Data

Special
Meaning and countermeasures
device
S00F In the power-up initialization, data invalidity
of RAM (back-up area) has been detected.
If retentive registers are used, these validity
are not guaranteed. (No error down)
FUN No.
The register of index modification is other
than RW, T, C and D. (Error down)
S064 The register designated by index
modification has exceeded the allowable
range. That is, out of RW, T, C and D.
(No error down)
Check the value of the index register.
S00A The data of built-in calendar LSI is illegal.
(No error down)
Set the date and time.
(Enhanced model only)
Entry No.
Multiple SUBR instructions which have the
same subroutine number are programmed.
(Error down)
Check the program.
S004 BCC error has been detected in the user
S013 program of the EEPROM. (Error down)
Reload the program and execute EEPROM
write operation again.
S007 The number of times of writing into
EEPROM has exceeded the life (100,000
times). (No error down)
Replace the unit because the data reliability
of the EEPROM will decrease.
S005 An abnormality has been detected in I/O
S020 bus checking. (Error down)
Check the expansion cable connection and
I/O module mounting status.
S005 The I/O allocation information and the
S021 actual I/O configuration are not identical.
(Error down)
Check the I/O allocation and the I/O module
mounting status.
S005 No response from the T2 I/O module has
S022 been received. (Error down)
Check the I/O allocation, the expansion
cable connection and the T2 I/O module
mounting status.
S005 I/O bus parity error has been detected in
S023 data read/write for T2 I/O modules. (Error
down)
Check the expansion cable connection and
the T2 I/O module mounting status.
S005 The allocated I/O register address exceeds
S021 the limit, 32 words. (Error down)
Check the I/O allocation.

Basic Hardware and Function

289

6F3B0253

10. Troubleshooting
Error message and related information
Event
Info 1
Info 2
Info 3
Illegal inst
Program Address
type in the
block No. block
Illegal sys intrpt

Invalid Fun inst

Invalid program

Loop nesting error

Memory full

No END/IRET error

No RET error

No sub-r entry

290

Special
Meaning and countermeasures
device
S006 An illegal instruction has been detected in
S030 the program. (Error down)
S060 Reload the program and execute EEPROM
write operation again.
Interrupt Interrupt
Unregistered interrupt has occurred. (No
address 1 address 2
error down)
If the error occurs frequently, replace the
unit.
Program Address Fun No.
A function instruction which is not supported
type in the
by the T1-16S is programmed. (Error down)
block No. block
Correct the program.
Program
A basic ladder instruction which is not
type supported by the T1-16S is programmed.
block No.
(Error down)
Correct the program.
SUBR instruction is not programmed before
RET instruction. (Error down)
Correct the program.
An abnormality is detected in the program
management information. (Error down)
Reload the program and execute EEPROM
write operation again.
Program Address
A FOR-NEXT loop is programmed inside
type in the
other FOR-NEXT loop. (Error down)
block No. block
Correct the program.
The program exceeds the executable
memory capacity. (Error down)
Reduce the program steps.
Program Address
The END instruction is not programmed in
type in the
the main program or in the sub-program.
block No. block
(Error down)
Correct the program.
The IRET instruction is not programmed in
the interrupt program. (Error down)
Correct the program.
Program Address Sub-r No.
The RET instruction is not programmed in
type in the
the subroutine program. (Error down)
block No. block
Correct the program.
Program Address Sub-r No.
The subroutine corresponding to CALL
type in the
instruction is not programmed. (Error down)
block No. block
Correct the program.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

10. Troubleshooting
Error message and related information
Event
Info 1
Info 2
Info 3
Operand error
Program Address
type in the
block No. block

Special
device

Pair inst error

Program Address
type in the
block No. block

Peripheral LSI err

Error
code

S004
S016

Program BCC error

Illegal
BCC

S006
S030

RAM check error

Error
address

Scan time over

Scan time

Error data Test data

S004
S012

S006
S031

Meaning and countermeasures
A register/device which is not supported by
the T1-16S is programmed. (Error down)
Correct the program.
The timer or counter register is duplicated in
the program. (Error down)
Correct the program.
The subroutine number programmed with
CALL or SUBR instruction is out of the
range. (Error down)
0 to 255
Correct the program.
Index modification is programmed for
instructions in which the index modification
is not allowed. (Error down)
Correct the program.
The combination is illegal for MCS-MCR,
JCS-JCR or FOR-NEXT instructions. (Error
down)
Correct the program.
A MCS-MCR is programmed inside other
MCS-MCR segment. (Error down )
Correct the program.
A JCS-JCR is programmed inside other
JCS-JCR segment. (Error down )
Correct the program.
CPU hardware error has been detected in
the power-up initialization. (Error down and
programming tool cannot be connected)
Replace the unit if the error remains after
power OFF and ON again.
BCC error has been detected in the user
program in the RAM. (Error down)
If the error remains after power OFF and
ON again, reload the program and execute
EEPROM write operation.
In the power-up initialization, an error has
detected by RAM read/write checking. (Error
down)
Replace the unit if the error remains after
power OFF and ON again.
The scan time has exceeded 200 ms. (Error
down)
Correct the program to reduce the scan time
or use WDT instruction to extend the check
time.

Basic Hardware and Function

291

6F3B0253

10. Troubleshooting
Error message and related information
Event
Info 1
Info 2
Info 3
Sys RAM check err
Error
Error data Test data
address

Sys ROM BCC error

System power off
System power on
Sub-r nesting err

WD timer error

292

Special
Meaning and countermeasures
device
S004 In the power-up initialization, an error has
S011 detected by system RAM read/write
checking. (Error down and programming
tool cannot be connected)
Replace the unit if the error remains after
power OFF and ON again.
Illegal
S004 BCC error has been detected in the system
BCC
S010 program in the ROM. (Error down and
programming tool cannot be connected)
Replace the unit if the error remains after
power OFF and ON again.
Power OFF (no error)
Power ON (no error)
Program Address Sub-r No.
The nesting of subroutines exceeds 3
type in the
levels.
block No. block
(Error down)
Correct the program.
Address 1 Address 2
S004 The watchdog timer error has occurred.
S01F (Error down)
If the error occurs frequently, replace the
unit.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Appendix

A.1
A.2

List of models and types, 294
Instruction index, 295

Basic Hardware and Function

293

6F3B0253

Appendix
A.1 List of models and types
• Basic unit
Model
T1-16S

Power supply
100 – 240Vac
24Vdc

Input type
24Vdc

RTC/RS-485
Yes
No
Yes
No

Type code
T1-MDR16SS
T1-MDR16SC
T1-MDR16SSD
T1-MDR16SCD

Part number
TDR116S6S
TDR116S6C
TDR116S3S
TDR116S3C

Type code
DI116M
DO116M
DD116M
RO108M
AD121M
AD131M
DA121M
DA131M
TC111M
FR112M

Part number
TDI116M∗S
TDO116M∗S
TDD116M∗S
TRO108M∗S
TAD121M∗S
TAD131M∗S
TDA121M∗S
TDA131M∗S
TTC111M∗S
TFR112M∗S

Type code
HP911A
T-PDS Windows
RM102
CU111

Part number
THP911A∗S
TMW33E2SS
TRM102∗∗S
TCU111∗∗S

Type code
CJ105
CJ102
PT16S

Part number
TCJ105∗CS
TCJ102∗CS
TPT16S∗AS

PT15S

TPT15S∗AS

PT15F

TPT15F∗AS

• I/O module
Description
16 points 24Vdc input
16 points 24Vdc output
8 points 24Vdc input and 8 points 24Vdc output
8 points relay output
1 channel analog input, 0 – 5V/0 - 20mA
1 channel analog input, ±10V
1 channel analog output, 0 – 20mA
1 channel analog output, ±10V
1 channel thermo couple input, K/E/J
TOSLINE-F10 remote station

• Peripherals
Description
Handy programmer (with 2 m cable for T1/T1S)
T-PDS software (Windows version)
Program storage module
Multi-drop adapter for computer link

• Cable and others
Description
T-PDS cable for T1/T1S, 5m length
HP911A cable for T1/T1S, 2m length (spare parts)
RS-232C connector for computer link
(with 2 m cable)
I/O module I/O connector for
DI116M/DO116M/DD116M, soldering type
I/O module I/O connector for
DI116M/DO116M/DD116M, flat cable type

294

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Appendix
A.2 Instruction index
• Instruction name
1 bit rotate left
1 bit rotate right
1 bit shift left
1 bit shift right
2’s complement
7-segment decode
Absolute value
Addition
Addition with carry
AND
ASCII conversion
ASCII to Hex conversion
Average value
BCD conversion
Bi-directional shift register
Binary conversion
Bit count
Bit test
Calendar operation
Coil
Counter
Data exchange
Data transfer
Decode
Decrement
Demultiplexer
Device/register reset
Device/register set
Digital filter
Direct I/O
Disable interrupt
Division
Double-word 2’s complement
Double-word addition
Double-word data transfer
Double-word equal
Double-word greater than
Double-word greater than or equal
Double-word less than
Double-word less than or equal
Double-word not equal
Double-word subtraction
Enable interrupt
Encode
End
Equal

173
172
165
164
232
234
231
143
149
156
236
162
228
238
170
237
202
163
218
121
132
139
136
201
155
177
197
196
160
239
209
146
233
147
137
286
284
285
288
289
287
148
208
200
135
180

Exclusive OR
Expanded data transfer
Flip-flop
FOR
Forced coil
Function generator
Greater than
Greater than or equal
Hex to ASCII conversion
Increment
Interrupt return
Invert coil
Invert transfer
Inverter
Jump control reset
Jump control set
Less than
Less than or equal
Lower limit
Master control reset
Master control set
Maximum value
Minimum value
Moving average
Multiplexer
Multiplication
n bit rotate left
n bit rotate right
n bit shift left
n bit shift right
NC contact
Negative pulse coil
Negative pulse contact
NEXT
NO contact
Not equal
OFF delay timer
ON delay timer
OR
Positive pulse coil
Positive pulse contact
Pre-derivative real PID
Reset carry
Set calendar
Set carry
Shift register

Basic Hardware and Function

158
241
215
205
122
229
178
179
161
154
210
124
138
123
134
134
182
183
225
133
133
226
227
159
176
145
175
174
167
166
118
128
126
206
117
181
130
129
157
127
125
219
199
217
198
168

295

6F3B0253

Appendix
Single shot timer
Special module data read
Special module data write
Step sequence initialize
Step sequence input
Step sequence output
Subroutine call
Subroutine entry
Subroutine return
Subtraction
Subtraction with carry
Table initialize
Table invert transfer
Table transfer
Transitional contact (falling)
Transitional contact (rising)
Unsigned division
Unsigned double/single division
Unsigned equal
Unsigned greater than
Unsigned greater than or equal
Unsigned less than
Unsigned less than or equal
Unsigned multiplication
Unsigned not equal
Up-down counter
Upper limit
Watchdog timer reset

296

T1-16S User’s Manual

131
245
247
212
213
214
203
207
204
144
150
140
142
141
120
119
152
153
192
190
191
194
195
151
193
216
224
211

6F3B0253

Appendix
• Instruction symbol
∗
+
+1
+C
-1
-C
/
<
<=
<>
=
>
>=
7SEG
ABS
AND
ASC
ATOH
AVE
BC
BCD
BIN
CALL
CLDN
CLDS
CNT
D+
DD<
D<=
D<>
D=
D>
D>=
DEC
DFL
DI
DIV
DMOV
DNEG
DPX
DSR
EI
ENC
END
EOR
F/F

145
143
154
149
144
155
150
146
182
183
181
180
178
179
234
231
156
236
162
228
202
238
237
203
217
218
132
147
148
188
189
187
186
184
185
201
160
209
153
137
233
177
170
208
200
135
158
215

FG
FOR
HTOA
I/O
IRET
JCR
JCS
LL
MAVE
MAX
MCR
MCS
MIN
MOV
MPX
NEG
NEXT
NOT
OR
PID3
READ
RET
RST
RSTC
RTL
RTL1
RTR
RTR1
SET
SETC
SHL
SHL1
SHR
SHR1
SR
SS
STIN
STIZ
STOT
SUBR
TEST
TINZ
TMOV
TNOT
TOF
TON
U∗
U/

229
205
161
239
210
134
134
225
159
226
133
133
227
136
176
232
206
138
157
219
245
204
197
199
175
173
174
172
196
198
167
165
166
164
168
131
213
212
214
207
163
140
141
142
130
129
151
152

U/D
U<
U<=
U<>
U=
U>
U>=
UL
WDT
WRITE
XCHG
XFER

216
194
195
193
192
190
191
224
211
247
139
241

Basic Hardware and Function

297

6F3B0253

298

T1-16S User’s Manual

TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Industrial Equipment Department
1-1, Shibaura 1-chome, Minato-ku
Tokyo 105-8001, JAPAN
Tel: 03-3457-4900 Fax: 03-5444-9268



File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : Yes
Create Date                     : 2001:11:02 18:20:06
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 4.0 for Windows
Modify Date                     : 2001:11:27 11:25:00+09:00
Page Count                      : 301